Siemens Mc35 Users Manual

MC35 to the manual c48099e1-c2e7-4e49-9763-f32d62d8b99b

2015-02-05

: Siemens Siemens-Mc35-Users-Manual-410381 siemens-mc35-users-manual-410381 siemens pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 256 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Siemens Cellular Engines
MC35 Module
MC35 Terminal
Version: 05.00
DocID: MC35_ATC_01_V05.00
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 2 of 256 15.07.2002
Document Name: AT Command Set
Siemens Cellular Engines
Version: 05.00
Date: July 15, 2002
Doc Id: MC35_ATC_01_V05.00
Status: Released
General note
With respect to any damages arising in connection with the described product or this document, Sie-
mens shall be liable according to the General Conditions on which the delivery of the described prod-
uct and this document are based.
This product is not intended for use in life support appliances, devices or systems where a malfunction
of the product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Siemens AG customers using
or selling this product for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify
Siemens for any damages resulting from illegal use or resale.
Applications incorporating the described product must be designed to be in accordance with the tech-
nical specifications provided in these guidelines. Failure to comply with any of the required procedures
can result in malfunctions or serious discrepancies in results.
Furthermore, all safety instructions regarding the use of mobile technical systems, including GSM
products, which also apply to cellular phones must be followed.
Handheld applications such as mobile phones or PDAs incorporating the described product must be in
accordance with the guidelines for human exposure to radio frequency energy. The Specific Absorp-
tion Rate (SAR) of the application must be evaluated and approved to be compliant with national and
international safety standards or directives.
Subject to change without notice at any time.
Copyright
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof,
are forbidden without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights re-
served in the event of grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2002
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 3 of 256 15.07.2002
Contents
0 Version History .............................................................................................9
1 Introduction.................................................................................................13
1.1 Scope of the document ...........................................................................................................13
1.2 Supported product versions and related documents ..............................................................14
1.3 Conventions ............................................................................................................................15
1.4 AT command syntax ...............................................................................................................15
1.4.1 Using parameters....................................................................................................................15
1.4.2 Combining AT commands on the same command line ..........................................................16
1.4.3 Entering successive AT commands on separate lines ...........................................................16
1.5 Supported character sets ........................................................................................................17
1.6 Flow control.............................................................................................................................18
1.6.1 Software flow control (XON/OFF flow control)........................................................................18
1.6.2 Hardware flow control (RTS/CTS flow control) .......................................................................18
2 Standard V.25ter AT Commands ...............................................................19
2.1 A/ Repeat previous command line .........................................................................................19
2.2 +++ Switch from data mode or PPP online mode to command mode...................................19
2.3 AT\Qn Flow control ................................................................................................................20
2.4 ATA Answer a call..................................................................................................................20
2.5 ATD Mobile originated call to dial a number ..........................................................................21
2.6 ATD><mem><n> Originate call to phone number <n> in memory <mem> ..........................23
2.7 ATD><n> Originate call to phone number selected from active memory..............................25
2.8 ATD><str> Originate call to phone number in memory with corresponding field ..................26
2.9 ATDI Mobile originated call to dialable ISDN number <n> ....................................................27
2.10 ATDL Redial last telephone number used .............................................................................28
2.11 ATE Enable command echo ..................................................................................................29
2.12 ATH Disconnect existing connection .....................................................................................29
2.13 ATI Display product identification information........................................................................30
2.14 ATI[value] Display additional identification information..........................................................30
2.15 ATL Set monitor speaker loudness........................................................................................31
2.16 ATM Set monitor speaker mode ............................................................................................31
2.17 ATO Switch from command mode to data mode / PPP online mode....................................31
2.18 ATQ Set result code presentation mode................................................................................32
2.19 ATP Select pulse dialling .......................................................................................................32
2.20 ATS0 Set number of rings before automatically answering the call ......................................32
2.21 ATS3 Write command line termination character ..................................................................33
2.22 ATS4 Set response formatting character...............................................................................33
2.23 ATS5 Write command line editing character..........................................................................33
2.24 ATS6 Set pause before blind dialling.....................................................................................34
2.25 ATS7 Set number of seconds to wait for connection completion ..........................................34
2.26 ATS8 Set number of seconds to wait for comma dial modifier..............................................34
2.27 ATS10 Set disconnect delay after indicating the absence of data carrier .............................35
2.28 ATS18 Extended error report.................................................................................................35
2.29 ATT Select tone dialling .........................................................................................................35
2.30 ATV Set result code format mode..........................................................................................36
2.31 ATX Set CONNECT result code format and call monitoring..................................................36
2.32 ATZ Set all current parameters to user defined profile..........................................................37
2.33 AT&C Set circuit Data Carrier Detect (DCD) function mode..................................................37
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 4 of 256 15.07.2002
2.34 AT&D Set circuit Data Terminal Ready (DTR) function mode...............................................38
2.35 AT&F Set all current parameters to manufacturer defaults ...................................................39
2.36 AT&S Set circuit Data Set Ready (DSR) function mode........................................................41
2.37 AT&V Display current configuration .......................................................................................42
2.38 AT&W Store current configuration to user defined profile .....................................................43
2.39 AT+GCAP Request complete TA capabilities list ..................................................................44
2.40 AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification........................................................................44
2.41 AT+GMM Request TA model identification............................................................................44
2.42 AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status ............................................45
2.43 AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification(IMEI).......................................................45
2.44 AT+ILRR Set TE-TA local rate reporting ................................................................................46
2.45 AT+IPR Set fixed local rate.....................................................................................................47
2.45.1 Autobauding ............................................................................................................................48
3 AT Commands for FAX...............................................................................49
3.1 AT+FBADLIN Bad Line Treshold...........................................................................................49
3.2 AT+FBADMUL Error Threshold Multiplier..............................................................................50
3.3 AT+FBOR Query data bit order .............................................................................................50
3.4 AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id ............................................................................51
3.5 AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service class .............................................................51
3.6 AT+FCQ Copy Quality Checking ...........................................................................................52
3.7 AT+FCR Capability to receive................................................................................................52
3.8 AT+FDCC Query or set capabilities.......................................................................................53
3.9 AT+FDFFC Data Compression Format Conversion ..............................................................54
3.10 AT+FDIS Query or set session parameters...........................................................................55
3.11 AT+FDR Begin or continue phase C data reception..............................................................56
3.12 AT+FDT Data Transmission ..................................................................................................56
3.13 AT+FET End a page or document .........................................................................................57
3.14 AT+FK Kill operation, orderly FAX abort................................................................................57
3.15 AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities .........................................................57
3.16 AT+FMDL Identify Product Model..........................................................................................58
3.17 AT+FMFR Request Manufacturer Identification ....................................................................58
3.18 AT+FOPT Set bit order independently...................................................................................58
3.19 AT+FPHCTO DTE Phase C Response Timeout ...................................................................59
3.20 AT+FREV Identify Product Revision......................................................................................59
3.21 AT+FRH Receive Data Using HDLC Framing .......................................................................59
3.22 AT+FRM Receive Data ..........................................................................................................60
3.23 AT+FRS Receive Silence ......................................................................................................60
3.24 AT+FTH Transmit Data Using HDLC Framing ......................................................................60
3.25 AT+FTM Transmit Data .........................................................................................................61
3.26 AT+FTS Stop Transmission and Wait ...................................................................................61
3.27 AT+FVRFC Vertical resolution format conversion.................................................................62
4 AT Commands originating from GSM 07.07 .............................................63
4.1 AT+CACM Accumulated call meter (ACM) reset or query ....................................................63
4.2 AT+CALA Set alarm time.......................................................................................................64
4.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax) set or query................................67
4.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge information ..............................................................................68
4.5 AT+CBST Select bearer service type ....................................................................................69
4.6 AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions control....................................................70
4.6.1 Examples: Call forwarding ......................................................................................................71
4.7 AT+CCLK Real Time Clock ...................................................................................................73
4.8 AT+CCUG: Closed User Group ..............................................................................................74
4.9 AT+CCWA Call waiting ..........................................................................................................75
4.10 AT+CEER Extended error report ...........................................................................................77
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 5 of 256 15.07.2002
4.11 AT+CFUN Set phone functionality.........................................................................................78
4.11.1 Wake up the ME from SLEEP mode.......................................................................................81
4.12 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification ......................................................................82
4.13 AT+CGMM Request model identification...............................................................................82
4.14 AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status ...............................................82
4.15 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification (IMEI) identical to GSN ................83
4.16 AT+CHLD Call hold and multiparty.........................................................................................83
4.17 AT+CHUP Hang up call .........................................................................................................84
4.18 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity....................................................84
4.19 AT+CIND Indicator control ......................................................................................................85
4.20 AT+CLCC List current calls of ME .........................................................................................87
4.21 AT+CLCK Facility lock ...........................................................................................................88
4.21.1 Examples: Enabling / disabling PIN 1 authentication .............................................................90
4.21.2 Examples: Phone lock.............................................................................................................91
4.21.3 Examples: Call barring ............................................................................................................93
4.22 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation....................................................................94
4.23 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction (by *# sequence) ...........................................95
4.24 AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level ....................................................................................96
4.25 AT+CMEE Report mobile equipment error ............................................................................97
4.26 AT+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting .......................................................................98
4.27 AT+CMUT Mute control .......................................................................................................100
4.28 AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode.........................................................................................101
4.28.1 Restricted use of AT commands in Multiplex mode..............................................................102
4.29 AT+COPN Read operator names ........................................................................................104
4.30 AT+COPS Operator selection..............................................................................................105
4.31 AT+CPAS Mobile equipment activity status ........................................................................107
4.32 AT+CPBR Read current phonebook entries........................................................................108
4.33 AT+CPBS Select phonebook memory storage....................................................................109
4.34 AT+CPBW Write phonebook entry ......................................................................................110
4.35 AT+CPIN Enter PIN .............................................................................................................111
4.35.1 What to do if PIN or password authentication fails? .............................................................114
4.36 AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2 .........................................................................................................116
4.37 AT+CPUC Price per unit and currency table .......................................................................118
4.38 AT+CPWD Change password .............................................................................................119
4.39 AT+CR Service reporting control .........................................................................................122
4.40 AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for incoming call indication.........................................123
4.41 AT+CREG Network registration...........................................................................................124
4.42 AT+CRLP Select radio link protocol param. for orig. non-transparent data call..................126
4.43 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access.......................................................................................127
4.44 AT+CSCS Set TE character set...........................................................................................128
4.45 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ................................................................................129
4.46 AT+CSQ Signal quality ........................................................................................................130
4.47 AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications...................................................................131
4.48 AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data .........................................................132
4.49 AT+VTD=<n> Tone duration................................................................................................133
4.50 AT+VTS DTMF and tone generation (<Tone> in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D}) .............................133
4.51 AT+WS46 Select wireless network .......................................................................................134
5 AT commands originating from GSM 07.05 for SMS .............................135
5.1 AT+CMGC Send an SMS command ...................................................................................135
5.2 AT+CMGD Delete SMS message........................................................................................136
5.3 AT+CMGF Select SMS message format .............................................................................136
5.4 AT+CMGL List SMS messages from preferred store ..........................................................137
5.5 AT+CMGR Read SMS message .........................................................................................140
5.6 AT+CMGS Send SMS message..........................................................................................143
5.7 AT+CMGW Write SMS message to memory.......................................................................145
5.8 AT+CMSS Send SMS message from storage.....................................................................147
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 6 of 256 15.07.2002
5.9 AT+CNMA New SMS message acknowledge to ME/TE, only phase 2+ ............................148
5.10 AT+CNMI New SMS message indications ..........................................................................149
5.11 AT+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage ......................................................................152
5.12 AT+CSCA SMS service centre address ..............................................................................154
5.13 AT+CSCB Select cell broadcast messages.........................................................................155
5.14 AT+CSDH Show SMS text mode parameters .....................................................................156
5.15 AT+CSMP Set SMS text mode parameters.........................................................................157
5.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service ....................................................................................158
6 GPRS AT commands in accordance with GSM 07.07............................159
6.1 Commands specific to MTs supporting GPRS .....................................................................159
6.1.1 AT+CGATT GPRS attach and detach .................................................................................159
6.1.2 AT+CGACT PDP context activate or deactivate..................................................................160
6.1.3 AT+CGDATA Enter data state.............................................................................................161
6.1.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context...................................................................................162
6.1.5 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable) ..........................................164
6.1.6 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested).........................................................168
6.1.7 AT+CGSMS Select service for MO SMS messages ...........................................................172
6.1.8 AT^SGAUTH Set type of authentication for PPP connection .............................................173
6.2 Modem compatibility commands to MTs supporting GPRS .................................................174
6.3 ATD *99# Request GPRS service .......................................................................................174
6.3.1 ATD *98# Request GPRS IP service..................................................................................175
6.3.2 ATH Manual rejection of a network request for PDP context activation ..............................176
6.4 Using GPRS AT commands (examples)...............................................................................177
6.4.1 Miscellaneous AT commands ...............................................................................................177
6.5 Using the GPRS dial command ATD....................................................................................179
7 AT Commands for SIM Application Toolkit (GSM 11.14).......................180
7.1 AT^SSTA Remote-SAT Interface Activation.........................................................................181
7.2 ^SSTN Remote-SAT Notification ..........................................................................................182
7.3 AT^SSTGI Remote-SAT Get Information .............................................................................183
7.4 AT^SSTR Remote-SAT Response .......................................................................................184
8 Siemens defined AT commands for enhanced functions .....................185
8.1 AT+CXXCID Display card ID (identical to AT^SCID)...........................................................185
8.2 AT^MONI Monitor idle mode and dedicated mode..............................................................186
8.3 AT^MONP Monitor neighbour cells......................................................................................188
8.4 AT^SACM Advice of charge and query of ACM and ACMmax ...........................................189
8.5 AT^SBC Battery charging / discharging and charge control................................................190
8.6 AT^SCID Display SIM card identification number................................................................193
8.7 AT^SCKS Set SIM connection presentation mode and query SIM connection status........194
8.8 AT^SCNI List Call Number Information ...............................................................................195
8.9 AT^SCTM Set critical operating temperature presentation mode or query temperature.....196
8.10 AT^SDLD Delete the “last number redial“ memory..............................................................198
8.11 AT^SHOM Display Homezone.............................................................................................198
8.12 AT^SLCD Display Last Call Duration...................................................................................198
8.13 AT^SLCK Facility lock..........................................................................................................199
8.14 AT^SMGL List SMS messages from preferred storage.......................................................201
8.15 AT^SMGO Set or query SMS overflow presentation mode or query SMS overflow ...........202
8.16 AT^SMSO Switch off mobile station ....................................................................................203
8.17 AT^SMGR Read SMS message without set to REC READ................................................203
8.18 AT^SM20 Set M20 Compatibility .........................................................................................204
8.19 AT^SNFA Set or query microphone attenuation..................................................................205
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 7 of 256 15.07.2002
8.20 AT^SNFD Set audio parameters to manufacturer default values........................................206
8.21 AT^SNFI Set microphone path parameters .........................................................................207
8.22 AT^SNFM Mute microphone................................................................................................208
8.23 Audio programming model....................................................................................................208
8.24 AT^SNFO Set audio output (= loudspeaker path) parameter..............................................209
8.25 AT^SNFPT Call progress tones..........................................................................................210
8.26 AT^SNFS Select audio hardware set...................................................................................211
8.27 AT^SNFV Set loudspeaker volume......................................................................................212
8.28 AT^SNFW Write audio setting in non-volatile store .............................................................212
8.29 AT^SPBC Search the first entry in the sorted telephone book ............................................213
8.30 AT^SPBG Read entry from active telephone book via sorted index ...................................214
8.31 AT^SPBS Steps the selected phonebook alphabetically.....................................................215
8.32 AT^SPIC Display PIN counter..............................................................................................216
8.33 AT^SPLM Read the PLMN list.............................................................................................217
8.34 AT^SPLR Read entry from the preferred operators list .......................................................218
8.35 AT^SPLW Write an entry to the preferred operators list......................................................219
8.36 AT^SPWD Change password for a lock ..............................................................................220
8.37 AT^SRTC Select, query, test ring tone parameters.............................................................222
8.38 AT^SSCONF SMS Configuration........................................................................................224
8.39 AT^SSDA Set Display Availability.......................................................................................225
8.40 AT^SSYNC Configure SYNC Pin.........................................................................................226
8.41 AT^STCD Display Total Call Duration .................................................................................228
9 APPENDIX .................................................................................................229
9.1 Summary of ERRORS and Messages..................................................................................229
9.1.1 Summary of CME ERRORS related to GSM 07.07..............................................................229
9.1.2 Summary of GPRS-related CME ERRORS..........................................................................230
9.1.3 Summary of CMS ERRORS related to GSM 07.05..............................................................231
9.1.4 Summary of Unsolicited Result Codes (URC) ......................................................................234
9.1.5 Result codes .........................................................................................................................237
9.1.6 Cause Location ID for the extended error report (AT+CEER) ..............................................237
9.1.7 GSM release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER) ...........................................238
9.1.8 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER) ...................................238
9.1.9 GSM release cause for Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER) ........................................239
9.1.10 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER) ...........................240
9.1.11 GSM release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER) ...................................................240
9.1.12 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER) ...........................................241
9.1.13 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Advice of Charge (AOC) (AT+CEER)...............................242
9.1.14 GSM release cause for Supplementary Service call (AT+CEER) ........................................242
9.1.15 Siemens release cause for Call related Supplementary Services (CRSS) (AT+CEER) ....243
9.1.16 GSM release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER) ........................................243
9.1.17 SIEMENS release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER) ................................244
9.1.18 SIEMENS release cause for GPRS API (AT+CEER)..........................................................244
9.1.19 SIEMENS release cause for Embedded Netcore (AT+CEER)...........................................245
9.2 Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands............................................................................246
9.3 AT commands available before entering the SIM PIN..........................................................248
9.4 Standard GSM service codes ...............................................................................................250
9.4.1 Additional notes on ^SCCFC, ^SCCWA, ^SCLCK ...............................................................252
9.5 GSM and UCS2 alphabet tables...........................................................................................254
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 8 of 256 15.07.2002
Figures
Figure 1: AT audio programming model...............................................................................................208
Tables
Table 1: Product specific use of AT commands.....................................................................................13
Table 2: Types of AT commands and responses...................................................................................15
Table 3: Illegal combinations of AT commands .....................................................................................16
Table 4: Character definitions depending on alphabet (examples)........................................................17
Table 5: Factory settings ........................................................................................................................39
Table 6: Summary of AT commands available in Alarm mode ..............................................................66
Table 7: Wake-up events in NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC SLEEP mode ................................................81
Table 8: Availability of AT commands on virtual channels ...................................................................102
Table 9: Summary of AT commands with different behaviour in Multiplex mode ...............................103
Table 10: Timing algorithm of incorrect password input.......................................................................114
Table 11: Summary of AT commands available in Charge-only and Alarm mode ..............................192
Table 12: Operating modes of the ME indicated by status LED (if <mode> = 1):................................227
Table 13: Summary of URCs................................................................................................................234
Table 14: Summary of Fax Class 2 URCs defined by EIA PN-2388 ...................................................236
Table 15: GSM service codes ..............................................................................................................250
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 9 of 256 15.07.2002
0 Version History
This chapter reports modifications and improvements over previous versions of the document.
"AT Command Set" Version MC35-ATC_01_V04.00 => MC35-ATC_01_V05.00
Chapter Page AT command
What is new
1.5 17 Character sets Chapter revised and associated character set tables
in Chapter 9.5 updated.
1.6 18 Flow control How to use flow control.
2.3 20 AT\Q<n> Further details added: Using RTS/CTS handshake.
Restoring AT\Q settings.
2.12 29 ATH Notes on Multiplex mode and GPRS operation cor-
rected
2.35 39 AT&F Added further commands to list of factory settings
2.45 47 AT+IPR Added note on minimum bit rate.
4.6 70 AT+CCFC Added note on applicability of <class> according to
GSM02.04.
4.9 75 AT+CCWA AT+CHLD can be used to put an active call on hold an
accept a waiting voice call. Not for data or fax calls.
Added notes on applicability of different <class>es.
4.11 78 AT+CFUN Chapter revised.
4.16 83 AT+CHLD Removed note on GPRS.
Added notes: AT+CHLD for voice calls only. Further
information on Call Waiting.
4.19 85 AT+CIND Revised Chapter.
4.21
8.13
88
199
AT+CLCK
AT^SLCK
Corrected description of “FD” lock: PIN2 is requested
as password (it is not sufficient to have done PIN2 au-
thentication before).
Added notes on applicability of different <class>es
and <fac>s.
4.21.2 91 AT+CLCK Modified examples.
4.24 96 AT+CLVL Added information on related AT commands
AT^SNF0, AT^SNFV, AT^SNFS
4.26 98 AT+CMER Revised Chapter.
4.27 100 AT+CMUT Added information on related AT commands
AT^SNF0, AT^SNFM, AT^SNFS
4.28.1 102f AT+CMUX AT\Q3 (hardware flow control) is recommended.
Notes regarding execution of ATH on different chan-
nels corrected.
4.36 116 AT+CPIN2 Added more details on validity of CPIN2 authentica-
tion.
4.44 128 AT+CSCS Further details added: Using RTS/CTS handshake.
Restoring AT\Q settings.
4.49
4.50
133
133
AT+VTD
AT+VTS
Revised chapters.
5.4
5.5
137
140
AT+CMGL
AT+CMGR
Removed all information on CB messages.
Added note regarding AT^SSCONF.
5.7 145 AT+CMGW Parameter <length> corrected (only required for PDU,
not for text mode).
Result code after failure of storin
g
a messa
g
e to the
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 10 of 256 15.07.2002
SIM card (ME returns OK or ERROR depending on
setting of AT^SM20).
Statement about sending e-mails via SMS corrected:
If not recognized by provider, @ may be replaced with
“*”.
5.10 149 AT+CNMI Notes regarding AT^SSCONF and AT^SMGO added.
Note regarding the handling of Class 0 short mes-
sages added.
5.11 152 AT+CPMS <mem3> now offers the choice between “MT” and
“SM”
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are now stored non-
volatile.
Added notes on handling <mem3>.
6.1.7 172 AT+CGSMS Modified parameter <service>=2 (GPRS preferred):
No SMS via GPRS during a circuit switched call.
6.1.8 173 AT^SGAUTH Notes added: Parameter cannot be stored with
AT&W. Default value after power-up is <auth>=3
(PAP and CHAP).
6.3.2 176 ATH Notes on deactivation of PDP context and GPRS con-
nection removed.
8.2
186f
AT^MONI
Response example b): Parameter C1 corrected.
<chann> and <rs> explained in greater detail
References for 3GPP TS 05.05 and 05.08 added
Notes modified:
If the radio cell changes during a connection, the pa-
rameters PWR and RXLev of the ‘Serving Cell’ part
will not be updated, and updating the Cell ID takes 1
or 2 seconds.
8.3 188 AT^MONP <chann> and <rs> explained in greater detail
Notes modified: During a connection new neighbour
cells can be added, but their parameters C1 and C2
will be updated after the call.
8.15 202 AT^SMGO Added note: Indication of URC requires
AT+CNMI=3,1. SMS indication during data transfer
via Break (100ms)
8.19 - 8.28 205 - 212 AT^SNF… All Chapters revised.
8.25 210 AT^SNFPT New AT command: Call progress tones
8.37 222 AT^SRTC New AT command: Select, query, test ringing tones
8.38 224 AT^SSCONF New AT command: Configuring recipient address pa-
rameters in SMS result codes and in +CDS URCs.
9.1.3 231 CMS errors Note and example added: Mapping of CME and CMS
errors if SIM PIN authentication has not been done.
9.1.4 234 URCs Added: URCs will be output after command execution.
Added list of Fax Class 2 URCs.
9.1.5 237 Result codes Removed 3 result codes “CONNECT…”, and pre-
served those wich include “CONNECT …/RLP”
Added to List of PIN1 requiring AT commands:
AT+CPIN2, AT^SSDA
9.3 248f Added to List of PIN1 independent AT commands:
AT+VTS, AT^SNFPT, AT^SRTC, AT^SSCONF
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 11 of 256 15.07.2002
"AT Command Set" Version MC35-ATC_01_V03.02 => MC35-ATC_01_V04.00
Chapter Page AT command
What is new
2.2 19 +++ Chapter revised.
2.5 21 ATD Parameters “G” and “g” for Closed User Group added.
2.17 31 ATO Chapter revised.
4.8 74 AT+CCUG New AT command: Closed User Group.
4.9 75 AT+CCWA New AT command: Call Waiting.
4.19 85 AT+CIND New AT command: Indicator control.
4.21 88 AT+CLCK Under parameter “PS” lock, the following statement
has been removed: “ME may remember numbers of
previously used cards.”
4.26 98 AT+CMER New AT command: Mobile equipment event reporting.
8.2
8.3
186f
188
AT^MONI
At^MONP
Statement regarding RING line revised.
8.19 205 AT^SNFA New AT command: Set or query microphone attenua-
tion
8.39 225 AT^SSDA New AT command: Set Display Availability
9.1.4 234 +CIEV: <text> added to list of URCs
9.2 - 9.3 246f - 248f AT+CCUG,
AT+CCWA,
AT+CMER,
AT^SSDA
AT+CIND
AT^SNFA
Added to Chapter 9.2 (PIN 1 required).
Added to Chapter 9.3 (PIN1 independent)
"AT Command Set" Version MC35-ATC_01_V02.00 => MC35_ATC_01_V03.02
Chapter Page AT command
What is new
1.4.2 16 Note regarding sequential order of concatenated commands added.
4.5 69 AT+CBST Command syntax corrected: Parameter <speed> is
mandatory.
4.6 70 AT+CCFC New <class> parameters added.
4.11 78 AT+CFUN SLEEP mode described in greater detail
4.21 88 AT+CLCK New <class> parameters added.
4.35.1 114 AT+CPIN Timing algorithm of incorrect password corrected
4.46 130 AT+CSQ Note added: Realistic BER values can be obtained
only if there is a call in progress.
5.11 152 AT+CPMS Difference between SM, ME and MT storage ex-
plained.
6.1.8 173 AT^SGAUTH New command to specify protocol for PPP authentica-
tion
8.2 186f AT^MONI Channel numbers are now issued in the form of 4-digit
numbers. Therefore, the examples on page 186 have
been updated.
Frequency hopping will now be indicated with “h” (in-
stead of the previously used “0”.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 12 of 256 15.07.2002
Notes modified: If during a connection the radio cell is
changed, the parameters LAC, Cell, NCC BCC, PWR
and RXLev of the ‘Serving Cell’ part will not be up-
dated.
8.7 194 AT^SCKS Notes regarding empty SIM card tray modified.
8.9 196 AT^SCTM Chapter revised due to improved presentation of tem-
perature shutdown URCs.
9.2 - 9.3 246f - 248f AT+CXXCID
AT^SCID
AT^SGAUTH
Both commands now independent of PIN authentica-
tion
Command added to list of PIN independent com-
mands
9.1 - 9.1.19
9.1.12
229 - 245f
241
Lists of result codes restructured.
Notification number 300 added: “Called party barred incoming call”
9.4
9.4.1
250f
252f
*# codes Chapter revised. Further examples added.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 13 of 256 15.07.2002
1 Introduction
1.1 Scope of the document
This document presents the AT Command Set for the Siemens cellular engines
MC35 Module
MC35 Terminal
The AT commands detailed in this document are supported by both products. Where differences oc-
cur, they are noted in the chapter that refers to the command. In the present version, the only excep-
tions concern these commands:
Table 1: Product specific use of AT commands
AT command MC35 Module MC35 Terminal
AT+CALA, Chapter 4.2 Alarm mode and reminder call
fully applicable
Does not support Alarm mode.
Please ignore any information relat-
ing to the subject.
The reminder call can be used as
described.
AT^SSYNC, Chapter 8.40 SYNC pin may be assigned dif-
ferent functions: <mode> 0 or 1.
SYNC pin supports only <mode>=1
(LED status).
AT^SBC, Chapter 8.5 All functions fully applicable
Command not applicable.
MC35 and MC35 Terminal feature basic SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) functionality which enables SIM
cards to run additional network based applications, such as value added services, online banking, in-
formation services etc. To give you an idea, Chapter 7 provides a brief overview. In greater detail, the
SAT functions and the required AT commands are described in [4].
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 14 of 256 15.07.2002
1.2 Supported product versions and related documents
Please note that this AT Command Set is intended for MC35 Version 05.00
Related documents
[1] MC35 Hardware Interface Description, Version 05.00
[2] Release Notes: MC35, Version 05.00
[3] MC35 GPRS Startup User's Guide
[4] MC35 Remote-SAT User's Guide, as of Version 05.00
[5] MC35 Multiplexer User's Guide, Version 05.00
[6] Application Note 16: Updating MC35 Firmware, as of Version 05.00
[7] MC35 Terminal Hardware Interface Description
[8] TC35 MC35 Terminal User's Guide
[9] Application Note 02: Audio Interface Design
[10] Multiplex Driver Developer’s Guide for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
[11] Multiplex Driver Installation Guide for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
Prior to using MC35 / MC35T or upgrading to a new firmware release, be sure to carefully read the
latest product information provided in the Release Notes.
To visit the Siemens Website you can use the following link:
http://www.siemens.com/wm
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 15 of 256 15.07.2002
1.3 Conventions
Throughout the document, the GSM engines are referred to as ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile
Station), TA (Terminal Adapter), DCE (Data Communication Equipment) or facsimile DCE (FAX mo-
dem, FAX board). When the Siemens product names are required to distinguish the two models,
MC35 is short for the engine type and MC35T for the terminal.
To control your GSM engine you can simply send AT Commands via its serial interface. The control-
ling device at the other end of the serial line is referred to as TE (Terminal Equipment), DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment) or plainly ´the application´ (probably running on an embedded system).
1.4 AT command syntax
The "AT" or "at" prefix must be set at the beginning of each command line. To terminate a command
line enter <CR>.
Commands are usually followed by a response that includes “<CR><LF><response><CR><LF>”.
Throughout this document, only the responses are presented, <CR><LF> are omitted intentionally.
Table 2: Types of AT commands and responses
Test command AT+CXXX=? The mobile equipment returns the list of parameters and
value ranges set with the corresponding Write command
or by internal processes.
Read command AT+CXXX? This command returns the currently set value of the pa-
rameter or parameters
Write command AT+CXXX=<...> This command sets user-definable parameter values.
Execution command AT+CXXX The execution command reads non-variable parameters
affected by internal processes in the GSM engine.
1.4.1 Using parameters
· Default parameters are underlined throughout this document.
· Optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets. If optional parameters are omitted, the cur-
rent settings are used until you change them.
· Optional parameters or subparamters can be omitted unless they are followed by other parame-
ters. If you want to omit a parameter in the middle of a string it must be replaced by a comma. Ex-
ample:
AT+CPBW=,<number>,<type>,<text> writes a phonebook entry to the first free memory location.
AT+CPBW=<index>,<number>,<type>,<text> writes a phonebook entry to the memory location
specified by <index>.
· When the parameter is a character string, e.g. <text> or <number>, the string must be enclosed in
quotation marks, e.g. "Charlie Brown" or "+49030xxxx". Symbols within quotation marks will be
recognized as strings.
· All spaces will be ignored when using strings without quotaton marks.
· It is possible to omit the leading zeros of strings which represent numbers.
· In case of using V.25ter commands without giving an optional parameter, its value is assumed to
be 0.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 16 of 256 15.07.2002
1.4.2 Combining AT commands on the same command line
You may enter several AT commands on the same line. This eliminates the need to type the "AT" or
"at" prefix before each command. Instead, it is only needed once at the beginning of the command
line. Use a semicolon as command delimiter.
The command line buffer accepts a maximum of 391 characters. If this number is exceeded none of
the commands will be executed and TA returns ERROR.
The table below lists the AT commands you cannot enter together with other commands on the same
line. Otherwise, the responses may not be in the expected order.
Table 3: Illegal combinations of AT commands
V.25ter commands With FAX commands, Prefix AT+F
GSM 7.07 commands With Siemens commands, Prefix AT^S
GSM 7.05 commands (SMS) --- To be used standalone
Commands starting with AT& --- To be used standalone
AT+IPR --- To be used standalone
Note: When concatenating AT commands please keep in mind that the sequence of processing may
be different from the sequential order of command input. Therefore, if the consecutive order of
the issued commands is your concern, avoid concatenating commands on the same line.
1.4.3 Entering successive AT commands on separate lines
When you enter a series of AT commands on separate lines, leave a pause between the preceding
and the following command until OK appears. This avoids sending too many AT commands at a time
without waiting for a response for each.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 17 of 256 15.07.2002
1.5 Supported character sets
The ME supports two character sets: GSM 03.38 (7 bit, also referred to as SMS alphabet) and UCS2
(16 bit, refer to ISO/IEC 10646). See Chapter 4.44 for information about selecting the character set.
Character tables are provided in Chapter 9.5.
Due to the constraints described below it is recommended to prefer the USC2 alphabet in any external
application.
If the GSM alphabet is selected all characters sent over the serial line are in the range from 0 ... 127.
CAUTION: GSM alphabet is not ASCII alphabet!
Several problems resulting from the use of the GSM alphabet:
1. "@" character with GSM alphabet value 0 is not printable by an ASCII terminal program (e.g. Mi-
crosoft© Hyperterminal®).
2. "@" character with GSM alphabet value of binary 0 will terminate any C string!
This is because the \0 is defined as C string end tag. Therefore, the GSM Null character may
cause problems on application level when using a ´C´-function as „strlen()“. This can be avoided if
it is represented by an escape sequence as shown in Table 4.
By the way, this may be the reason why even network providers often replace "@"with “@=*” in
their SIM application.
3. Other characters of the GSM alphabet are misinterpreted by an ASCII terminal program. For ex-
ample, GSM "ö" (as in "Börse") is assumed to be "|" in ASCII, thus resulting in "B|rse". This is be-
cause both alphabets mean different characters with values hex. 7C or 00 and so on.
4. In addition, decimal 17 and 19 which are used as XON/XOFF control characters when software
flow control is activated, are interpreted as normal characters in the GSM alphabet.
When you write characters differently coded in ASCII and GSM (e.g. Ä, Ö, Ü), you need to enter es-
cape sequences. Such a character is translated into the corresponding GSM character value and,
when output later, the GSM character value can be presented. Any ASCII terminal then will show
wrong responses.
Table 4: Character definitions depending on alphabet (examples)
GSM 03.38
character
GSM character
hex. value
Corresponding
ASCII character
ASCII
Esc sequence
Hex
Esc sequence
Ö 5C \ \5C 5C 35 43
" 22 “ \22 5C 32 32
ò 08 BSP \08 5C 30 38
@ 00 NULL \00 5C 30 30
CAUTION: Often, the editors of terminal programs do not recognize escape sequences. In this case,
an escape sequence will be handled as normal characters. The most common workaround to this
problem is to write a script which includes a decimal code instead of an escape sequence. This way
you can write, for example, short messages which may contain differently coded characters.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 18 of 256 15.07.2002
1.6 Flow control
Flow control is essential to prevent loss of data or avoid errors when, in a data or fax call, the sending
device is transferring data faster than the receiving side is ready to accept. When the receiving buffer
reaches its capacity, the receiving device should be capable to cause the sending device to pause un-
til it catches up.
There are basically two approaches to regulate data flow: software flow control and hardware flow
control. The High Watermark of the input / output buffer should be set to approximately 60% of the to-
tal buffer size. The Low Watermark is recommended to be about 30%. The data flow should be
stopped when the capacity rises close to the High Watermark and resumed when it drops below the
Low Watermark. The time required to cause stop and go results in a hysteresis between the High and
Low Watermarks.
In Multiplex mode, it is recommended to use hardware flow control. For details please refer to [5].
1.6.1 Software flow control (XON/OFF flow control)
Software flow control sends different characters to stop (XOFF, decimal 19) and resume (XON, deci-
mal 17) data flow. The only advantage of software flow control is that three wires would be sufficient
on the serial interface.
1.6.2 Hardware flow control (RTS/CTS flow control)
Hardware flow control sets or resets the RTS/CTS wires. This approach is faster and more reliable,
and therefore, the better choice. When the High Watermark is reached, CTS is set inactive until the
transfer from the buffer has completed. When the Low Watermark is passed, CTS goes active once
again.
To achieve smooth data flow, ensure that the RTS/CTS lines are present on your application platform.
The application should include options to enable RTS/CTS handshake with the GSM engine. This
needs to be done with the AT command AT\Q3 - it is not sufficient to set RTS/CTS handshake in the
used Terminal program only.
The default setting of the GSM engine is AT\Q0 (no flow control) which must be altered to AT\Q3
(RTS/CTS hardware handshake on). The setting is stored volatile and must be restored each time af-
ter the GSM engine was switched off. For further details refer to Chapter 2.3.
AT\Q has no read command. To verify the current setting of AT\Q, simply check the settings of the ac-
tive profile with AT&V.
Often, fax programs run an intialization procedure when started up. The intialization commonly in-
cludes enabling RTS/CTS hardware handshake, eliminating the need to set AT\Q3 once again. How-
ever, before setting up a CSD call, you are advised to check that RTS/CTS handshake is set.
RTS/CTS hardware handshake must also be set if you want to take advantage of the CYCLIC SLEEP
modes. For further details refer to Chapter 4.11, AT+CFUN.
Note: After deactivating the RTS line, the ME may still send up to 32 bytes. This can be easily han-
dled if the buffer of the host application is sufficiently sized, and if a hysteresis is implemented
in its Rx buffer as mentioned in Chapter 1.6. A total buffer capacity of 256 bytes has been
proved to work well.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 19 of 256 15.07.2002
2 Standard V.25ter AT Commands
These AT Commands are related to ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union, Telecommunica-
tion sector) V.25ter document.
MC35 supports the registers S0-S29. You can change S0,S3,S4,S5,S6,S7,S8,S10,S18 by using the
appropriate ATSn commands. All the other registers are read-only and for internal usage only!
2.1 A/ Repeat previous command line
Execute command
A/
Response
Repeats previous command line. Line does not need to end with terminating
character.
Parameter
Reference
V.25ter
Note
· After beginning with the character “a“ or „A“, a second character “t“ ,”T“ or “/“
has to follow. In case of using a wrong second character, it is necessary to
start again with character “a“ or “A“.
· If autobauding is active (see +IPR, pg. 46) A/ (and a/) cannot be used.
2.2 +++ Switch from data mode or PPP online mode to command mode
Execute command
+++
Response
This command is only available during a CSD call or a GPRS connection. The
+++ character sequence causes the TA to cancel the data flow over the AT inter-
face and switch to command mode. This allows you to enter AT commands while
maintaining the data connection to the remote device or, accordingly, the GPRS
connection.
OK
To prevent the +++ escape sequence from being misinterpreted as data, it must
be preceded and followed by a pause of at least 1000 ms. The +++ characters
must be entered in quick succession, all within 1000 ms.
Reference
V.25ter
Note:
· To return from command mode to data or PPP online mode: Enter ATO as de-
scribed in Chapter 2.17.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 20 of 256 15.07.2002
2.3 AT\Qn Flow control
Execute command
AT\Q<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 0 AT\Q0 No flow control
1 AT\Q1 XON/XOFF software flow control
2 AT\Q2 Only CTS by DCE
3 AT\Q3 RTS/CTS hardware flow control
Required for the following procedures: incoming
or outgoing data calls, fax calls, GPRS connec-
tions, CYCLIC SLEEP modes set with AT+CFUN.
Often, the initialization routine of Fax programs in-
cludes enabling RTS/CTS handshake, eliminating
the need to issue AT\Q3 once again.
Reference
Note
Line state refers to RS-232 levels.
The setting of AT\Q is stored volatile and must be restored each time after the
GSM engine was switched off. Also, there is no way to store AT\Q to the user
defined profile.
See also Chapter 1.6 for general information on flow control.
2.4 ATA Answer a call
Execute command
ATA
TA causes remote station to go off-hook (e.g. answer call).
Note1: Any additional commands on the same command line are ignored.
Note2: This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. It can´t be aborted in some connection setup states, such as
handshaking.
Response
Response in case of data call, if successfully connected:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data mode.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
Response in case of voice call, if successfully connected:
OK
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
Response if no connection:
NO CARRIER
Parameter
Reference
V.25ter
Note
See also AT+ATX and Chapter 9.1.5 for <text>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 21 of 256 15.07.2002
2.5 ATD Mobile originated call to dial a number
Execute command
ATD[<n>]
[<mgsm][;]
This command can be used to set up outgoing voice, data or fax calls. It also
serves to control supplementary services.
Note:
The command may be aborted generally when receiving an ATH command during
execution. It can´t be aborted in some connection setup states, such as handshak-
ing.
Two different call setup options can be determined for voice calls: TA returns OK
either after dialing was completed or after call has been established. Setting is
made with AT^SM20 (see Chapter 8.18). In data connections, call setup always
terminates when call has been established.
Response
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<n> String of dialling digits and optionally V.25ter modifiers (dialling digits):
0-9, * , #, +, A, B, C
V.25ter modifiers: these are ignored: ,(comma), T, P, !, W, @
Emergency call:
<n> = 112 worldwide number (no SIM needed)
<mgsm> String of GSM modifiers:
I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to called
party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
G Activate Closed User Group explicit invocation for this call only.
g Deactivate Closed User Group explicit invocation for this call only.
<;> Only required to set up voice calls. TA remains in command mode.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 22 of 256 15.07.2002
Reference
V.25ter/GSM
07.07
Note
· Before setting up a data call, check that RTS/CTS handshake is enabled. See
Chapters 1.6 and 2.3.
· Parameter ”l“ and ”i“ only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· <mgsm> is not supported for data calls.
· <n> is default for last number that can be dialled by ATDL.
· See also +ATX and chapter 9.1.5 for <text>.
· The *# codes can only be used with voice calls (i.e.if “;” is appended).
· If ATD is used with a USSD command (e.g. ATD*100#;) an AT+CUSD=1 is
executed implicitly (see AT+CUSD, pg. 132).
· Parameter ‘G’ or ‘g’ will be ignored if Closed User Group was already activated,
or accordingly, deactivated with AT+CCUG command.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 23 of 256 15.07.2002
2.6 ATD><mem><n> Originate call to phone number <n> in memory <mem>
This command allows you to dial a phone number from a specific phonebook. To initiate a call, enter
a two letter abbreviation for the phonebook <mem>, followed by the memory location <n> of the de-
sired entry. The location range of each phonebook can be queried by AT+CPBR (see Chapter 4.32).
Execute command
ATD><mem>
<n>[<mgsm>][;]
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to the specified number.
Note: This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection
setup such as handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<mem> phonebook:
"SM” SIM phonebook (storage depending on SIM card)
”FD” SIM fixdialling phonebook (pos. 1-7)
”LD” SIM last-dialling-phonebook (usually the last 10 numbers di-
aled are stored on the SIM card, no matter whether or not the
calls were successfully set up)
”MC” ME missed (unanswered received) calls list (up to 10 numbers)
”RC” SIM received calls list
”ME” ME Phonebook (up to 50 numbers)
”ON” SIM (or ME) own numbers (MSISDNs) list
Note: <mem> must be included in quotation marks (""), if parameter
<mgsm> is used. If not, quotation marks are optional.
<n> Integer type memory location in the range of locations available in
the selected memory, i.e. the index number returned by AT+CPBR.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 24 of 256 15.07.2002
<mgsm> I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number
to called party)
<;> Only required to set up voice calls. TA remains in command mode.
Reference
V.25ter/GSM
07.07
Note
· There is no <mem> for emergency call (“EN”).
· Command is not supported for data call!
· Parameter <mgsm> only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· The *#-codes can only be used with voice calls (i.e.if “;” is appended).
· See also ATX and chapter 9.1.5 for <text>.
Example To query the location number of the phonebook entry:
AT+CPBR=1,xx
TA returns the entries available in the active phonebook.
To dial a number from the SIM phonebook, for example the number stored to
location 15:
ATD>SM15;
OK
To dial a phone number stored in the last dial memory on the SIM card:
ATD>LD9;
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 25 of 256 15.07.2002
2.7 ATD><n> Originate call to phone number selected from active memory
This command can be used to dial a phone number selected from the active memory. The active
memory is the phonebook selected with AT+CPBS (see Chapter 4.33). To set up a call simply enter
the memory location of the desired entry. The memory location range of each phonebook can be
queried by AT+CPBR (see Chapter 4.32).
Execute command
ATD><n>[<mgsm>][;]
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to the stored number.
Note: This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character
during execution. It can´t be aborted in some connection setup states,
such as handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<n> integer type memory location should be in the range of locations
available in the memory used, i.e. the index number returned by
AT+CPBR.
<mgsm> I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number
to called party)
<;> Only required to set up voice calls. TA remains in command mode.
Reference
V.25ter/GSM 07.07
Note
· Parameter <mgsm> only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· Command is not supported for data call!
· The *# codes can only be used with voice calls (i.e.if “;” is appended).
· See also +ATX and chapter 9.1.5 for <text>.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 26 of 256 15.07.2002
2.8 ATD><str> Originate call to phone number in memory with correspond-
ing field
This command searches the active phonebook for a given string <str> and dials the assigned phone
number. The active phonebook is the one set with AT+CPBS.
Execute command
ATD><str>[mgsm][;]
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to stored number
Note: This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character dur-
ing execution. It can´t be aborted in some connection setup states,
such as handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<str> string type value (“x”), which should equal an alphanumeric field in
at least one phonebook entry in the searched memories; used char-
acter set should be the one selected with AT+CSCS. <str> can con-
tain escape sequences as described in Chapter 1.5.
<str> must be wrapped in quotation marks (""), if escape sequences
or parameter <mgsm> are used or if the alphanumeric strings con-
tains a blank. If not, quotation marks are optional.
<mgsm> I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
<;> Only required to set up voice calls. TA remains in command mode.
Reference
V.25ter/GSM 07.07
Note
Command is not supported for data calls! See also ATX and Chapter 9.1.5 for
<text>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 27 of 256 15.07.2002
2.9 ATDI Mobile originated call to dialable ISDN number <n>
Execute command
ATDI<n>[;]
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to ISDN number.
Note: This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. This command cannot be aborted in some connection setup
states, such as handshaking.
Response
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successful connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<n> [+]<d> phone number
string with maximum length of 20 characters
+ international dialling format
<d> ISDN number
string of digits: +,0-9, A, B, C
<;> voice call
Reference
V.25ter
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 28 of 256 15.07.2002
2.10 ATDL Redial last telephone number used
Execute command
ATDL[;]
This command redials the last voice and data call number used in the ATD com-
mand.
· To redial the last data call number simply enter ATDL
· To redial the last voice call number type ATDL;
Note: The command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. This command cannot be aborted in some connection setup
states, such as handshaking.
Response
If there is no last number or number is not valid:
+CME ERROR
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode after call release:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<;> voice call
Reference
V.25ter
Note
In case of voice calls “;” is necessary.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 29 of 256 15.07.2002
2.11 ATE Enable command echo
Write command
ATE[<value>]
This setting determines whether or not the TA echoes characters received from
TE during command state.
Response
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Echo mode off
1 Echo mode on
Reference
V.25ter
Note
In case of using the command without parameter, <value> is set to 0.
2.12 ATH Disconnect existing connection
Execute command
ATH[n]
Disconnects any call in progress, such as voice, fax or CSD calls. See notes be-
low for GPRS and multiplex mode.
Response
OK
Note:
OK is issued after circuit 109 (DCD) is turned off (RS-232 level), if it was previ-
ously on.
Parameter
<n> 0 terminate call
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Using ATH in Multiplex mode (AT+CMUX):
· ATH terminates every voice, fax or CSD call, no matter on which channel ATH
was executed.
For example, if ATH is executed on channel 2 or 3, a voice call made on chan-
nel 1 will be disconnected, too.
This behaviour is in accordance with ITU-T V.25 ter; (07/97, see “6.3.6 Hook
control“: "ATH is terminating any call in progress").
Using ATH while GPRS is active during Multiplex mode:
· ATH clears an active PDP context or terminates an existing PPP connection,
but only if issued on the same logical channel where GPRS is used. It does not
affect PDP contexts and PPP connections on other channels.
· See also Chapter 6.3.2, ATH Manual rejection of a network request for PDP
context activation.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 30 of 256 15.07.2002
2.13 ATI Display product identification information
Execute command
ATI
Response
ME issues product information text
SIEMENS
MC35
REVISION xx.yy
OK
Explanation of “Revision“ parameter:
Version xx and variant yy of software release.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.14 ATI[value] Display additional identification information
Execute command
ATI[value]
Response
<value>=9 delivers the following information. Other values are not supported and
only return OK.
ATI9 SIEMENS Gipsy Soft Protocolstack V2.550
MC35
Reference
V.25ter
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 31 of 256 15.07.2002
2.15 ATL Set monitor speaker loudness
Execute command
ATL[val]
Response
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
· The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25ter compatibil-
ity reasons and have no effect.
· In multiplex mode the command is supported on logical channel 1 only.
2.16 ATM Set monitor speaker mode
Execute command
ATM[val]
Response
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
· The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25ter compatibil-
ity reasons and have no effect.
· In multiplex mode the command is supported on logical channel 1 only.
2.17 ATO Switch from command mode to data mode / PPP online mode
Execute command
ATO[n]
Response
ATO is the corresponding command to the +++ escape sequence described in
Chapter 2.2: When you have established a CSD call or a GPRS connection and
TA is in command mode, ATO causes the TA to resume the data or GPRS con-
nection and takes you back to data mode or PPP online mode.
If connection is not successfully resumed
NO CARRIER
or
TA returns to data or PPP online mode from command mode
CONNECT <text>
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
Parameter
<n> 0 switch from command mode to data or PPP online mode
Reference
V.25ter
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 32 of 256 15.07.2002
2.18 ATQ Set result code presentation mode
Write command
ATQ[<n>]
Response
Specifies whether or not the TA transmits any result code to the TE. Information
text transmitted in response is not affected by this setting.
If <n>=0:
OK
If <n>=1:
(none)
Parameter
<n> 0 DCE transmits result code
1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.19 ATP Select pulse dialling
Execute command
ATP
Response
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
No effect for GSM
2.20 ATS0 Set number of rings before automatically answering the call
Read command
ATS0?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS0=<n>
Specifies whether or not the TA will accept an incoming data / fax call without
user intervention. <n> determines the number of rings to wait before the TA will
automatically answer.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 000 disables automatic answer mode
001-255 enables automatic answering after specified number of rings
Reference
V.25ter
Note
· Auto-answer mode is only applicable to data or fax calls.
· If <n> is set too high, the calling party may hang up before the call can be
automatically answered.
· The correlation between ATS7 and ATS0 is important.
Example: Call setup may fail if ATS0=20 and ATS7=30.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 33 of 256 15.07.2002
2.21 ATS3 Write command line termination character
Read command
ATS3?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS3=<n>
This parameter setting determines the character recognized by TA to terminate
an incoming command line.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 000-013-127 command line termination character
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.22 ATS4 Set response formatting character
Read command
ATS4?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS4=<n>
This parameter setting determines the character generated by the TA for result
code and information text.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 000-010-127 response formatting character.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.23 ATS5 Write command line editing character
Read command
ATS5?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS5=<n>
This parameter setting determines the character recognized by TA as a request
to delete the immediately preceding character from the command line.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 000-008-127 command line editing character
Reference
V.25ter
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 34 of 256 15.07.2002
2.24 ATS6 Set pause before blind dialling
Read command
ATS6?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS6=<n>
No effect for GSM
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 000-255 number of seconds to wait before blind dialling.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.25 ATS7 Set number of seconds to wait for connection completion
Read command
ATS7?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS7=<n>
Specifies the number of seconds the TA will wait for the completion of the call
setup when answering or originating a data call. Also referred to as "no answer
timeout". To put it plainly, this is the time to wait for the carrier signal. If no carrier
signal is received within the specified time, the TA hangs up.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>0 <n> 000 – 060 no. of seconds to wait for connection completion.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
· Values greater than 60 cause no error, but <n> will be restored to the maxi-
mum value of 60.
· If called party has specified a high value for ATS0=<n>, call setup may fail.
· The correlation between ATS7 and ATS0 is important.
Example: Call setup may fail if ATS7=30 and ATS0=20.
· ATS7 is only applicable to data calls.
2.26 ATS8 Set number of seconds to wait for comma dial modifier
Read command
ATS8?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS8=<n>
No effect for GSM
Response
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 35 of 256 15.07.2002
2.27 ATS10 Set disconnect delay after indicating the absence of data carrier
Read command
ATS10?
Response
<n> OK
Write command
ATS10=<n>
This parameter setting determines the amount of time, that the TA remains con-
nected in absence of a data carrier. If the data carrier is detected before discon-
nect, the TA remains connected.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 001-002-254 number of tenths of seconds of delay
Reference
V.25ter
Note
2.28 ATS18 Extended error report
Test command
ATS18?
Response
<n> OK
Execute command
ATS18=<n>
TA returns an extended report of the reason for the last call release and location.
<n> 0 – 255, odd numbers set extended error report and even
numbers disable this feature.
Response
+Cause: <location ID>: <reason > OK
Parameter
<location ID> Location ID as number code (see subclause 9.1.6.
<reason> Reason for last call release as number code (see subclause
9.1.6).
Reference
Siemens
Note
This command works for data calls only. For voice calls please use AT+CEER.
2.29 ATT Select tone dialling
Execute command
ATT
Response
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
No effect for GSM
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 36 of 256 15.07.2002
2.30 ATV Set result code format mode
Write command
ATV[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines the contents of the header and trailer transmit-
ted with result codes and information responses.
When <value> =0
0
When <value> =1
OK
Parameter
<value>
0 Information response: <text><CR><LF>
Short result code format: <numeric code><CR>
1 Information response: <CR><LF><text><CR><LF>
Long result code format: <CR><LF><verbose code><CR><LF>
Reference
V.25ter
Note
In case of using the command without parameter <value> will be set to 0.
Information responses described in chapter 9 (verbose code and numeric code).
2.31 ATX Set CONNECT result code format and call monitoring
Write command
ATX[<value>]
Response
This parameter setting determines whether or not the TA detects the presence of
dial tone and busy signal and whether or not TA transmits particular result codes.
OK
Parameter
<value>
0 CONNECT result code only returned, dial tone and busy de-
tection are both disabled
1 CONNECT<text> result code only returned, dial tone and busy
detection are both disabled
2 CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is
enabled, busy detection is disabled
3 CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is
disabled, busy detection is enabled
4 CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone and busy de-
tection are both enabled
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Related <text> see chapter 9.1.5.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 37 of 256 15.07.2002
2.32 ATZ Set all current parameters to user defined profile
Execute command
ATZ[<value>]
Response
TA sets all current parameters to the user profile stored with AT&W (see Chapter
2.38 on page 43). If a connection is in progress, it will be terminated. All defined
GPRS contexts which are not activated or not online will be undefined (see
+CGDCONT,+CGQREQ,+CGQMIN commands). The user defined profile is
stored to the non-volatile memory.
Note: If invalid, the user profile will be reset to the factory default profile. Any ad-
ditional commands on the same command line will be ignored. A delay of 300 ms
is required before next command is sent, otherwise “OK” response may be cor-
rupted.
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Reset to user profile
Reference
V.25ter
Note
The GSM engines referred to in this manual can be assigned two profiles: the
factory profile (restored with AT&F) and the user profile (stored with AT&W). See
Chapter 2.35 for details on AT&F.
2.33 AT&C Set circuit Data Carrier Detect (DCD) function mode
Write command
AT&C[<value>]
Response
This parameter determines how the state of circuit 109(DCD) relates to the detec-
tion of received line signal from the distant end.
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 DCD line is always ON.
1 DCD line is ON in the presence of data carrier only.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Line state refers to RS-232 levels.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 38 of 256 15.07.2002
2.34 AT&D Set circuit Data Terminal Ready (DTR) function mode
Write command
AT&D[<value>]
Response
This command is only intended for data calls. The <value> parameter determines
how the TA responds when circuit 108/2 (DTR) is changed from ON to OFF dur-
ing data mode.
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 TA ignores status on DTR.
1 ON->OFF on DTR: Change to command mode while retaining
the connected call.
2 ON->OFF on DTR: Disconnect data call, change to command
mode. During state DTR = OFF is auto-answer off.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Line state refers to RS-232 levels.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 39 of 256 15.07.2002
2.35 AT&F Set all current parameters to manufacturer defaults
Execute command
AT&F[value]
Response
TA sets all current parameters to the manufacturer defined profile.
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Set all TA parameters to manufacturer default.
See Table 5: Factory settings.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
In addition to the default profile, you can store an individual one with
AT&W. To alternate between the two profiles enter either ATZ (loads
user profile) or AT&F (restores factory profile). Refer to Chapter 2.38 for
AT&W and Chapter 2.32 for ATZ.
Audio parameters set with AT^SNFA, AT^SNFO and AT^SNFI can be-
stored with AT^SNFD. See Chapter 8.20.
Table 5: Factory settings
Category Command and factory setting
V.25ter commands E1, Q0, V1, X4, \Q, &D2, &C1, &S0, +ILRR=0
S registers S0=0, S3=13, S4=10, S5=8, S6=0, S7=60, S10=2, S18=0
Fax commands +FCLASS=0
GSM 07.07 commands +CCWA=0
+CBST=7,0,1
+CPBS=”SM”
+CFUN=1
+CRC=0
+CR=0
+CRLP=61,61,78,6
+CMEE=0
+CMER=0,0,0,0,0
+CREG=0
+CSCS=”GSM”
+VTD=1
GSM 07.05 commands
for SMS
+CMGF=0
+CNMI=0,0,0,0,1
+CPMS=”MT”, “MT”, “MT”
+CSDH=0
+CSMS=0,1,1,1
+CSMP=17,167,0,0
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 40 of 256 15.07.2002
Category Command and factory setting
GSM 07.07 commands
for GPRS
+CGDCONT AT&F clears every context which is not active or not
online.
+CGQREQ AT&F clears the QoS profiles of every context which
is not active or not online.
+CGQMIN AT&F clears the minimum QoS profiles of every con-
text which is not active or not online.
Siemens defined com-
mands
^SM20= 1,1
^SCKS <n>=0
^SACM <n>=0
^SSDA=0
^SSCONF=0
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 41 of 256 15.07.2002
2.36 AT&S Set circuit Data Set Ready (DSR) function mode
Write command
AT&S<value>
Response
This parameter determines how the TA sets circuit 107 (DSR) depending on the
communication state of the TA interfacing TE.
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 DSR always on.
1 TA in command mode: DSR is OFF.
TA in data mode: DSR is ON.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Line state refers to RS-232 levels.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 42 of 256 15.07.2002
2.37 AT&V Display current configuration
Execute command
AT&V[<n>]
Response
TA returns the current parameter setting. The configuration varies depending on
whether or not PIN authentication has been done, or Multiplex mode has been
activated.
Parameter
<n> 0 profile number
PIN entered or not required (see
AT+CPIN, pg. 110)
Required PIN not entered Configuration
without Multiplex
mode or configu-
ration on chan-
nel 1 if Multiplex
mode is enabled
ACTIVE PROFILE:
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &S0 \Q0
S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008 S6:000 S7:060
S8:000 S10:002 S18:000
+CBST: 7,0,1
+CRLP: 61,61,78,6
+CR: 0
+FCLASS: 0
+CRC: 0
+CMGF: 0
+CNMI: 0,0,0,0,1
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 0
+CMEE: 0
^SMGO: 0,0
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
^SACM: 0,"000000","000000"
^SCKS: 0,1
+CREG: 0,1
+CLIP: 0,2
+CAOC: 0
+COPS: 0,0,"operator"
OK
ACTIVE PROFILE:
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &S0 \Q0
S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008 S6:000 S7:060
S8:000 S10:002 S18:000
+CBST: 7,0,1
+CRLP: 61,61,78,6
+CR: 0
+FCLASS: 0
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 0
+CMEE: 0
^SCKS: 0,1
OK
Logical channels
2 and 3 (Multi-
plex mode en-
abled)
+CRC: 0
+CMGF: 0
+CNMI: 0,0,0,0,1
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 19200
+CMEE: 0
^SMGO: 0,0
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
^SACM: 0,"000000","000000"
^SCKS: 0,1
+CREG: 0, 1
+CLIP: 0,2
+CAOC: 0
+COPS: 0,0,"operator"
OK
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 19200
+CMEE: 0
^SCKS: 0,1
OK
Reference
Note: Parameter values and order are subject to change.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 43 of 256 15.07.2002
2.38 AT&W Store current configuration to user defined profile
Execute command
AT&W[<n>]
TA stores the current settings to a user defined profile in the non-volatile memory.
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n> 0 number of profile
Reference
V.25ter
Note
The user defined profile will be loaded automatically after PowerUp. Use ATZ to
restore user profile and AT&F to restore factory settings. Until the first use of
AT&W, ATZ works as AT&F. See Chapter 2.32 for details on ATZ and Chapter
2.35 for AT&F.
List of settings stored to user defined profile:
· ATE, ATQ, ATV, ATX, AT+CRC, AT+CMGF, AT+CSDH, AT+CNMI, AT+ILRR,
AT+CMEE, AT^SMGO, AT+CSMS, AT^SACM, ^SCKS, AT+CREG, AT+CLIP,
AT+COPS.
AT&C, AT&D, AT&S, ATS0, ATS3, ATS4, ATS5, ATS6, ATS7, ATS8, ATS10,
ATS18, AT+FCLASS, AT+CBST, AT+CRLP, AT+CR.
User defined profiles in multiplex mode:
· On each multiplexer channel you can save an individual profile.
· List of settings stored to profile on multiplexer channel 1:
ATE, ATQ, ATV, ATX, AT+CRC, AT+CMGF, AT+CSDH, AT+CNMI, AT+ILRR,
AT+CMEE, AT^SMGO, AT+CSMS, AT^SACM, ^SCKS, AT+CREG, AT+CLIP,
AT+COPS.
AT&C, AT&D, AT&S, ATS0, ATS3, ATS4, ATS5, ATS6, ATS7, ATS8, ATS10,
ATS18, AT+FCLASS, AT+CBST, AT+CRLP, AT+CR.
· List of settings stored to profile on multiplexer channels 2 and 3:
ATE, ATQ, ATV, ATX, AT+CRC, AT+CMGF, AT+CSDH, AT+CNMI, AT+ILRR,
AT+CMEE, AT^SMGO, AT+CSMS, AT^SACM, ^SCKS, AT+CREG, AT+CLIP,
AT+COPS. (Parameters for data call are not relevant on channels 2 and 3.)
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 44 of 256 15.07.2002
2.39 AT+GCAP Request complete TA capabilities list
Test command
AT+GCAP=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Execute command
AT+GCAP
Response
TA reports a list of additional capabilities.
+GCAP: <name>
OK
Parameter
<name> e.g.: +CGSM,+FCLASS
Reference
V.25ter
Note
+CGSM: The response text shows which GSM commands of the ETSI standard
are supported.
2.40 AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification
Test command
AT+GMI=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+GMI
Response
TA reports information to identify the manufacturer.
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
See also ”AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification”, Chapter 4.12.
2.41 AT+GMM Request TA model identification
Test command
AT+GMM=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+GMM
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit the user to identify
the specific model of device.
MC35
OK
Reference
V.25ter
Note
See also ”AT+CGMM Request model identification”, Chapter 4.13.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 45 of 256 15.07.2002
2.42 AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status
Test command
AT+GMR=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+GMR
Response
TA returns product software version identification text.
REVISION xx.yy
OK
xx.yy Version xx and variant yy of software release.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
See also AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status, Chapter
4.14.
2.43 AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification(IMEI)
Test command
AT+GSN=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+GSN
Response
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit the user to identify
the individual device.
<sn>
OK
Parameter
<sn> IMEI of the telephone(International Mobile station Equipment Identity)
Reference
V.25ter
Note
The serial number (IMEI) varies for every individual ME device.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 46 of 256 15.07.2002
2.44 AT+ILRR Set TE-TA local rate reporting
Test command
AT+ILRR=?
Response
+ILRR: (list of supported <value>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+ILRR?
Response
+ILRR: <value> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+ILRR=
<value>
The write command specifies whether or not an intermediate result code shall in-
dicate the currently used local rate when an incoming or outgoing data call is es-
tablished. The message is transmitted from the DCE (= TA) to the DTE (=TE) be-
fore the final result code of the connection setup (e.g. CONNECT) appears.
Response
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Disables reporting of local port rate
1 Enables reporting of local port rate
Intermediate result code
+ILRR:<rate>
Parameter
<rate> port rate setting in bit per second
0 (Autobauding, see Chapter 2.45.1)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Example ATD030112233445
+ILRR: 57600
CONNECT 9600/RLP
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 47 of 256 15.07.2002
2.45 AT+IPR Set fixed local rate
Test command
AT+IPR=?
Response
+IPR: (list of supported auto-detectable <rate>s), (list of supported fixed-only
<rate>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+IPR?
Response
+IPR: <rate> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+IPR=<rate>
This command specifies the DTE-DCE bitrate. When you set a fix rate, make sure
that both DTE (TE) and DCE (= TA) are configured to the same rate. When you
select autobauding the DCE will automatically recognize the bitrate currently used
by the DTE.
A selected bitrate takes effect following the issue of any result code associated
with this command (e.g. OK).
The setting is stored in the non-volatile memory and will be used whenever the
engine is powered up again. However, in case of autobaud mode (+IPR=0) the
detected DCE bitrate will not be saved and, therefore, needs to be be re-
synchronized after restarting the GSM engine (see Chapter 2.45.1).
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<rate> bit rate per second
0 (Autobauding, see Chapter 2.45.1)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
In order to account for greater amounts of data it is recommended to choose a
minimum bit rate of 2400 bps. If the ME is operated in Multiplex mode we suggest
a minimum bit rate of 4800 bps.
Reference
V.25ter
Note
Factory setting is <rate>=0. It cannot be restored with AT&F. The current setting
will be preserved when you download new firmware or when the ME is powered
down.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 48 of 256 15.07.2002
Generally, AT+IPR=x should be used as a standalone command. If nevertheless
combinations with other commands on the same line cannot be avoided, there are
several constraints to be considered:
· Avoid combinations with the AT commands listed in Chapter 1.4.2.
· Take into account that a delay of 100 ms is required between a response to the
last command (e.g. OK) and the next command on the same line.
· When you enter AT+IPR=0, autobauding will be activated after the response to
the last command is received.
· When local echo is active (ATE1) and you enter AT+IPR=x with other com-
mands you may encounter the following problem: If switching to the new bit
rate takes effect while a response is being transmitted, the last bytes may be
sent at the new bit rate and thus, not properly transmitted. The following com-
mands will be correctly sent at the new bit rate.
2.45.1 Autobauding
Autobauding allows the GSM engine to automatically detect the bitrate configured in the host applica-
tion. The serial interface of the GSM engine supports autobauding for the following bitrates: 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200. Factory setting is autobauding enabled. This gives
you the flexibility to put the GSM engine into operation no matter what bitrate your host application is
configured to.
To take advantage of autobaud mode specific attention must be paid to the following requirements:
Synchronization between DTE and DCE
Ensure that DTE and DCE are correctly synchronized and the bitrate used by the DTE is detected by
the DCE (= ME). To allow the bitrate to be synchronized simply issue an "AT" or "at" string. This is
necessary
· after you have activated autobauding
· when you start up the GSM engine while autobauding is enabled. It is recommended to wait 3 to 5
seconds before sending the first AT character. Otherwise undefined characters might be returned.
If you want to use autobauding and autoanswer at the same time, you can easily enable the synchro-
nization, when you activate autobauding first and then configure the autoanswer mode (ATS0=0).
Restrictions on autobauding operation
· The serial interface has to be operated at 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit (factory setting).
· The A/ command (and a/) cannot be used.
· Only the strings “AT“ or “at“ can be detected (neither “aT“ nor “At“).
· The Unsolicited Result Codes "^SYSSTART", "^SYSSTART ALARM MODE" and "^SYSSTART
CHARGE-ONLY MODE" are not indicated when you start up the ME while autobauding is enabled.
This is due to the fact that the new bitrate is not detected unless DTE and DCE are correctly syn-
chronized as described above.
· Any other Unsolicited Result Codes that may be issued before the ME detects the new bitrate (by
receiving the first AT command string) will be sent at the previous bitrate.
· It is not recommended to switch to autobauding from a bitrate that cannot be detected by the auto-
baud mechnism (e.g. 300 baud). Responses to +IPR=0 and any commands on the same line might
be corrupted.
· When entering several AT commands on the same line, consider the requirements described in the
Notes of Chapter 2.45.
· See also AT+ILRR Set TE-TA local rate reporting , pg. 45
Autobauding and multiplex mode
If autobauding is active you cannot switch to multiplex mode (see +CMUX, pg. 101). Vice versa, when
you run the multiplex mode, the write command AT+IPR=<rate> cannot be used.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 49 of 256 15.07.2002
3 AT Commands for FAX
The following commands can be used for FAX transmission. If the ME is acting as a Fax modem to a
PC-based application (e.g. “WinFax“) it is necessary to select the proper Service Class (Fax Class)
provided by the ME. The ME reports its Service Class capabilities, the current setting and the range of
services available. This is provided by the AT+FCLASS command (see pg. 51).
Note: When sending a FAX with a standard FAX application for Personal Computers it is recom-
mended to use autobauding (AT+IPR=0).
Currently defined Service Class values (see TIA/EIA-592-A)
ME +FCLASS parameter Service Class Reference, Standard
C 0 data modem e.g. TIA/EIA-602 or ITU V.25ter
C 1 Service Class 1 EIA/TIA-578-A
1.0 Service Class 1 ITU-T T.31
C 2 manufacture specific this document and EIA PN-2388 (draft)
2.0 Service Class 2 TIA/EIA-592
2.1 Service Class 2 TIA/EIA-592-A or ITU-T T.32
8 Voice DCE TIA IS-101
Reserved
Note: Be aware that there is a difference between Service Classes 2 and 2.0! Only the first is applica-
ble to the ME.
Responses that may occur during a fax call are presented in the form of Unsolicited Result Codes
(URCs). A summary of Fax specific URCs is listed in Chapter 9.1.4, Table 14.
3.1 AT+FBADLIN Bad Line Treshold
Read command
AT+FBADLIN?
This command defines the “Copy-Quality-OK”-threshold. If <badline> consecu-
tive lines have pixel count errors in normal resolution (98 dpi) mode, then the
copy quality is unacceptable. If <badline> * 2 consecutive lines have pixel count
errors in fine resolution (196 dpi) mode, then the copy quality is unacceptable.
“Copy Quality Not OK” occurs if either the error percentage is too high or too
many consecutive lines contain errors. A value of 0 implies that error checking
is not present or disabled.
Response
<badlin> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FBADLIN=
<badlin>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<badlin> 0 – 10 – 255 bad lines
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 50 of 256 15.07.2002
3.2 AT+FBADMUL Error Threshold Multiplier
Read command
AT+FBADMUL?
This command defines the “Copy-Quality-OK” multiplier. The number of lines
received with a bad pixel count is multiplied by this number. If the result ex-
ceeds the total number of lines on the page the error rate is considered too
high. A threshold multiplier value of 20 corresponds to a 5% error rate. A value
of 0 implies that error checking is not present or disabled.
Response
<badmul> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FBADMUL=
<n>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<n> 0 – 20 – 255
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.3 AT+FBOR Query data bit order
Test command
AT+FBOR=?
Query the bit order for receive-mode. The mode is set by the ME dependent on
the selected Service Class, see “AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service
class”, pg. 51.
Response
(list of supported bit order modes <bor>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FBOR?
Response
<bor> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FBOR=<bor>
Response
OK
Parameter
<bor> 0 direct bit order for both Phase C and for Phase B/D data.
1 Reversed bit order for Phase C data, direct Bit Order for
Phase B/D data.
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 51 of 256 15.07.2002
3.4 AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id
Test command
AT+FCIG =?
Response
(max. length of Local Polling ID string) (range of supported ASCII character
values) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FCIG?
Response
<id> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FCIG =<id>
Response
OK
Parameter
<id> Local Polling ID string, max. length and possible content as reported
by test command. Default value is empty string (“”).
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
See also “AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities”, pg. 57.
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.5 AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service class
Test command
AT+FCLASS=?
See introduction to fax commands, pg. 49.
Response
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FCLASS?
Response
<n> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FCLASS=
<n>
The ME is set to a particular mode of operation (data, fax). This causes the MA
to process information in a manner suitable for that type of information.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 0 data (e.g. EIA/TIA-602 or ITU V.25ter)
1 Fax class 1 (EIA/TIA-578-A, Service Class 1)
2 Fax class 2 (EIA/TIA SP-2388, an early draft version of
EIA/TIA-592-A – Service class 2.1)
Reference
EIA/TIA-592-A
Note
Using Error Correcting Mode (ECM) when sending FAXes over GSM should be
avoided.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 52 of 256 15.07.2002
3.6 AT+FCQ Copy Quality Checking
Test command
AT+FCQ =?
This command controls Copy Quality checking when receiving a fax.
Response
(list of supported copy quality checking <cq>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FCQ?
Response
<cq> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FCQ =<cq>
Response
OK
Parameter
<cq> 0 No copy quality checking. The ME will generate Copy Qual-
ity OK (MCF) responses to complete pages.
1 ME can check 1-D phase data. The connected application
must check copy quality for 2-D phase C data
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for for Faxclass 2 only.
3.7 AT+FCR Capability to receive
Write command
AT+FCR=<cr>
Response
OK
Parameter
<cr> 0 ME will not receive message data. This can be used when
the application has insufficient storage. The ME can send
and can be polled for a file.
1 ME can receive message data.
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 53 of 256 15.07.2002
3.8 AT+FDCC Query or set capabilities
Test command
AT+FDCC =?
This command allows the connected application to sense and constrain the
capabilities of the facsimile DCE (=ME), from the choices defined in CCITT
T.30 Table 2.
Response
(list of <VR>s), (list of <BR>s), (list of <WD>s), (list of <LN>s), (list of <DF>s),
(list of <EC>s), (list of <BF>s), (list of <ST>s)
OK
Parameter
VR: Vertical Resolution, BR: Bit Rate, WD: Page Width, LN: Page Length, DF:
Data Compression Format, EC: Error Correction Mode, BF: Binary File Trans-
fer Mode, ST: Scan Time/Line.
Note: For further information see AT+FDIS, pg. 55
Read command
AT+FDCC?
Response
<dcc> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FDCC=<VR>,
<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,
<ST>
Response
OK
Parameter
VR: Vertical Resolution, BR: Bit Rate, WD: Page Width, LN: Page Length, DF:
Data Compression Format, EC: Error Correction Mode, BF: Binary File Trans-
fer Mode, ST: Scan Time/Line.
Note: For further information see AT+FDIS, pg. 55
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 54 of 256 15.07.2002
3.9 AT+FDFFC Data Compression Format Conversion
Test command
AT+FDFFC=?
This parameter determines the ME response to a mismatch between the data
format negotiated for the facsimile session, reported by the +FDCS:DF sub-
parameter, and the Phase C data desired by the controlling application, indi-
cated by the optional +FDT:DF subparameter, or the +FDIS=DF subparameter
for the +FDR operation.
Response
(list of supported <df>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FDFFC?
Response
<df> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FDFFC =<df>
Response
OK
Parameter
<df> 0 Mismatch checking is always disabled. The controlling ap-
plication has to check the +FDCS: DF subparameter and
transfer matching data.
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Fax Class 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 55 of 256 15.07.2002
3.10 AT+FDIS Query or set session parameters
Test command
AT+FDIS =?
This command allows the controlling application to sense and constrain the
capabilities used for the current session. It uses +FDIS to generate DIS or
DTC messages directly, and uses +FDIS and received DIS messages to gen-
erate DCS messages.
Response
(list of <VR>s), (list of <BR>s), (list of <WD>s), (list of <LN>s), (list of <DF>s),
(list of <EC>s), (list of <BF>s), (list of <ST>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FDIS?
Response
<cdec> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FDIS =
<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,
<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,
<BF>,<ST>
Response
OK
Parameter
Vertical Resolution VR 0 normal, 98 lpi
1 fine, 196 lpi
Bit Rate BR 0 2400 bit/s, V.27ter
1 4800 bit/s, V.27ter
2 7200 bit/s, V.29
3 9600 bit/s, V.29
Page Width WD 0 *) 1728 pixels in 215mm
1 2048 pixels in 255 mm
2 2432 pixels in 303 mm
3 1216 pixels in 151 mm
4 864 pixels in 107 mm
Page Length LN 0 A4, 297mm
1 B4, 364mm
2 unlimited length
Data Compression Format DF 0 *) 1-D modified Huffman
1 2-D modified read
2 2-D uncompressed mode
Error correction EC 0 *) disable ECM
(Annex A/T.30) 1 enable ECM, 64 bytes/frame
2 enable ECM, 256 bytes/frame
Binary File mode BF 0 *) disable BFT
Transfer Mode 1 enable BFT
Scan Time/Line ST 0 *) 0 ms (at VR= normal)
1 5 ms
2 10 ms
3 10 ms
4 20 ms
5 20 ms
6 40 ms
7 40 ms
*) Note: Only the default value needs to be implemented. Use test command
to check which parameter values are really possible!
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 56 of 256 15.07.2002
3.11 AT+FDR Begin or continue phase C data reception
Execute command
AT+FDR
The +FDR command initiates transition to Phase C data reception.
Response
CONNECT
or
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.12 AT+FDT Data Transmission
Execute command
AT+FDT
This command requests the ME to transmit a Phase C page. When the ME is
ready to accept Phase C data, it issues the negotiation responses and the
CONNECT result code to the application.
In Phase B, the +FDT command releases the ME to proceed with negotiation,
and releases the DCS message to the remote station. In Phase C, the +FDT
command resumes transmission after the end of a data stream transmited be-
fore.
Response
CONNECT
Write command
AT+FDT =<dt>
Response
CONNECT
Parameter
<dt> DF,VR,BR,WD,LN comma separated parameter list
Data Compression Format DF 0 1-D modified Huffman
1 2-D modified read
2 2-D uncompressed mode
Vertical Resolution VR 0 normal, 98 lpi
1 fine, 196 lpi
Bit Rate BR 0 2400 bit/s, V.27ter
1 4800 bit/s, V.27ter
2 7200 bit/s, V.29
3 9600 bit/s, V.29
Page Width WD 0 1728 pixels in 215mm
1 2048 pixels in 255 mm
2 2432 pixels in 303 mm
3 1216 pixels in 151 mm
4 864 pixels in 107 mm
Page Length LN 0 A4, 297mm
1 B4, 364mm
2 unlimited length
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 57 of 256 15.07.2002
3.13 AT+FET End a page or document
Write command
AT+FET=<ppm>
This command indicates that the current page or partial page is complete. An
ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the mode is on-
hook.
Response
OK
Parameter
<ppm> Post Page Message Codes
1 another document next
2 no more pages or documents
4 another page, procedure interrupt
5 another document, procedure interrupt
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.14 AT+FK Kill operation, orderly FAX abort
Execute command
AT+FK
This command causes the TA to terminate the session in an orderly manner.
Response
OK
Reference
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.15 AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities
Test command
AT+FLID =?
Response
(max. character length of Local ID string) (range of supported ASCII character
values) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FLID?
Response
< lid > OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FLID =<lid>
Response
OK
Parameter
<lid> Local ID string, max. length and possible content as reported by test
command. Default value is empty string (“”).
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
See also “AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id”, pg. 50.
Used for Faxclass 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 58 of 256 15.07.2002
3.16 AT+FMDL Identify Product Model
Read command
AT+FMDL?
Send the model identification to the TA
Response
Gipsy Soft Protocolstack
OK
Reference
Siemens
Note
Used for Faxclass 2 only
3.17 AT+FMFR Request Manufacturer Identification
Read command
AT+FMFR?
Send the manufacturer identification to the TA
Response
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
Siemens
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
3.18 AT+FOPT Set bit order independently
Write command
AT+FOPT=<opt>
Model specific command to set bit order independently of the understanding
which is "mirrored" and which is direct.
Response
OK
Parameter
<opt> 0 non-standard
1 standard
Reference
Siemens
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 59 of 256 15.07.2002
3.19 AT+FPHCTO DTE Phase C Response Timeout
Read command
AT+FPHCTO?
The time-out value <tout> determines how long the DCE will wait for a command
after reaching the end of data when transmitting in Phase C. When time-out is
reached, the DCE assumes that there are no more pages or documents to send.
Response
<tout> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FPHCTO=
<tout>
Parameter
<tout> 0 – 30 – 255 time-out value in 100ms units.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
3.20 AT+FREV Identify Product Revision
Test command
AT+FREV?
Sends the revision identification to the TA
Response
V2.550
OK
Reference
Siemens
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
3.21 AT+FRH Receive Data Using HDLC Framing
Execute command
AT+FRH=<mod>
This command causes the TA to receive frames using the HDLC protocol and the
modulation defined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is
issued while the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod> modulation mode
3 V21 Ch2 300 bps
24 V.27ter 2400 bps
48 V.27ter 4800 bps
72 V.29 7200 bps
96 V.29 9600 bps
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Fax class 1 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 60 of 256 15.07.2002
3.22 AT+FRM Receive Data
Test command
AT+FRM=?
Response
(List of supported modulation modes <mod>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FRM=<mod
>
This command causes the TA to enter the receiver-mode using the modulation
defined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while
the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod> 96 V.29 9600 bps
72 V.29 7200 bps
48 V.27ter 4800 bps
24 V.27ter 2400 bps
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Faxclass 1 only
3.23 AT+FRS Receive Silence
Write command
AT+FRS=<time>
+FRS=n causes the TA to report an OK result code to the TE after <time> 10 mil-
lisecond intervals of silence have been detected on the line. This command is
aborted if any character is received by the DTE. The modem discards the abort-
ing character and issues an OK result code. An ERROR response code results if
this command is issued while the mode is on-hook.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<time> 0 – 255 no. of 10 millisecond intervals
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Faxclass 1 only
3.24 AT+FTH Transmit Data Using HDLC Framing
Write command
AT+FTH=<mod>
This command causes the TA to transmit data using HDLC protocol and the
modulation mode defined below. An ERROR response code results if this com-
mand is issued while the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
Parameter
<mod> 3 V.21 Ch2 300 bps
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Faxclass 1 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 61 of 256 15.07.2002
3.25 AT+FTM Transmit Data
Test command
AT+FTM=?
Response
(List of supported modulation modes) OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FTM=<mod>
This command causes the TA to transmit data using the modulation mode de-
fined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while
the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod> modulation mode
96 V.29 9600 bps
72 V.29 7200 bps
48 V.27ter 4800 bps
24 V.27ter 2400 bps
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Fax class 1 only
3.26 AT+FTS Stop Transmission and Wait
Write command
AT+FTS=<time>
This command causes the TA to terminate a transmission and wait for <time> 10
millisecond intervals before responding with the OK result code to the DTE.
Response
An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the modem is
on-hook.
Parameter
<time> 0 – 85 no. of 10 millisecond intervals
Reference
TIA/EIA-578
Note
Used for Fax class 1 only
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 62 of 256 15.07.2002
3.27 AT+FVRFC Vertical resolution format conversion
Test command
AT+FVRFC =?
This command determines the DCE response to a mismatch between the vertical
resolution negotiated for the facsimile session and the Phase C data desired by
the DTE.
Response
(List of supported mismatch checking modes) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+FVRFC?
Response
<vrfc> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+FVRFC
=<vrfc>
Response
OK
Parameter
<vrfc> 0 disable mismatch checking.
2 enable mismatch checking, with resolution conversion of 1-D
data in the DCE, and an implied AT+FK command executed
on 2-D mismatch detection
Reference
EIA PN-2388
Note
Used for Fax class 2 only
The following AT commands are dummy commands. Invoking these commands will not cause ER-
ROR result codes, but these commands have no functionality.
AT+FAA Auto Answer mode
AT+FECM Error Correction Mode control
AT+FLNFC Page Length format conversion
AT+FLPL Indicate document available for polling
AT+FMINSP Minimum Phase C speed
AT+FRBC Phase C data receive byte count
AT+FREL Phase C received EOL alignment
AT+FSPL Enable polling
AT+FTBC Phase C data transmit byte count
AT+FWDFC Page width format conversion
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 63 of 256 15.07.2002
4 AT Commands originating from GSM 07.07
These AT Commands are according to ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)
GSM 07.07 document.
4.1 AT+CACM Accumulated call meter (ACM) reset or query
Test command
AT+CACM=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Read command
AT+CACM?
Response
TA returns the current ACM value.
+CACM: <acm> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<acm> string type; three bytes of the current ACM value in hexadecimal for-
mat (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000 – FFFFFF
Write command
AT+CACM=
[<passwd>]
Parameter
<passwd> string type:
SIM PIN2
Response
TA resets the Advice of Charge related to the accumulated call meter (ACM)
value in SIM file EF(ACM). ACM contains the total number of home units both
for the current and preceding calls.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
GSM 07.07
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 64 of 256 15.07.2002
4.2 AT+CALA Set alarm time
Test command
AT+CALA=?
Test command returns supported array index values <n>, alarm types <type>,
and maximum length of the text <tlength> to be output.
Response
+CALA: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <type>s), (range of sup-
ported <tlength>) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CALA?
Read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the ME.
Response
+CALA: <time>[,<n>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CALA=<time>
[,<n>[,<type>[,<te
xt>]]]
The write command sets an alarm time in the ME. When the alarm is timed out
and executed the ME returns an Unsolicited Result Code (URC). The alarm call
can adopt two functions, depending on whether or not you switch the GSM en-
gine off after setting the alarm:
Reminder call: You can use the alarm function as a wake-up or reminder call.
For this purpose, set the alarm as described below and do not
switch off or power down the ME. When executed the call
comes as an Unsolicited Result Code.
Applies to MC35 and MC35 Terminal.
Alarm mode: You can use the alarm call to restart the ME when powered
down. For this purpose, set the alarm as described below. Then
power down the ME by entering the AT^SMSO command (pg.
202). When the alarm time is reached, the ME will wake up to
Alarm mode. To prevent the ME from unintentionally logging
into the GSM network, Alarm mode provides restricted opera-
tion. Upon wake-up, the ME indicates an Unsolicited Result
Code which reads: ^SYSSTART ALARM MODE. A limited
number of AT commands is available during Alarm mode:
AT+CCLK, AT+CALA, AT^SBC, AT^SCTM, AT^SMSO.
The ME remains deregistered from the GSM network. If you
want the ME to return to full operation (normal operating mode)
it is necessary to drive the ignition line (IGT pin of ZIF interface)
to ground. If your application is battery powered note that
charging cannot be started while ME is in Alarm mode. For de-
tails please refer to the "Hardware Interface Description" sup-
plied with your GSM engine.
Applies to MC35 module only. MC35 Terminal does not support
the Alarm mode.
Response
OK
If setting fails:
+CME ERROR: <err> Refer to Chapter 9.1.1, pg. 229, for <err> values.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 65 of 256 15.07.2002
Parameter
<time> string type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss", where characters
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes. E.g. 6th of
May 2001, 22:10:00 hours equals to “01/05/06,22:10:00" (see also
+CCLK). Note: if <time> equals current date and time or is to an ear-
lier date, TA returns +CME ERROR: <21>.
<n> integer type value indicating the array index of the alarm. Index starts
with 0. If only this value is returned by the test command, it is default
and indicates that only one alarm time is possible; however, if a sec-
ond alarm time is set, the previous alarm is deleted.
<type> integer type value indicating the type of the alarm
0 Alarm indication: text message via serial interface
<text> string type value indicating the text to be displayed when alarm time
is reached; maximum length is <tlength>. After first connection to
power supply <text> is undefined.
Note: <text> will be stored to the non-volatile flash memory when the
device enters the Power Down mode via AT^SMSO (pg. 202). Once
saved, it will be available upon next power-up, until you overwrite it by
typing another text. This eliminates the need to enter the full string
when setting a fresh alarm and thus, saves memory due to the limited
number of flash memory write cycles (e.g. 100.000).
<tlength> integer type value indicating the maximum length of <text>. The
maximum length is 16.
Unsolicited result code
Indicates reminder call:
+CALA: <text>
Indicates ME wake-up into Alarm mode:
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: <text>
If autobauding is active (AT+IPR=0) the URCs ^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
and +CALA: <text> do not appear. Therefore, avoid using Alarm mode in con-
junction with autobauding.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· <text> should not contain characters which are coded differently in ASCII
and GSM (e.g. Ä, Ö, Ü), see also Chapter 9.5.
· In the event of power outage the GSM engine retains the current alarm set-
ting, but the RTC will be reset to <time> = “00/01/01,00:00:00” and must be
restored after resume of power (see also AT+CCLK, pg. 73. It is only in
Power Down mode, that the RTC is kept powered from a dedicated voltage
regulator, thus saving the current date and time.
· When the GSM engine wakes up to Alarm mode, the system takes 1s to re-
initialize the RTC and to update the current time. Therefore, it is recom-
mended to wait 1s before using the AT+CCLK command (for example 1s af-
ter ^SYSSTART has been output).
· Please consider when using multiplex mode (+CMUX, pg. 101):
- It is possible to use +CALA with every logical channel (1 – 3).
- The total no. of possible alarm events is shared by all channels. If <n> =
0 is returned by the test command, this indicates that only one common
alarm time is possible for all logical channels.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 66 of 256 15.07.2002
- For every channel a different <text> parameter can be stored.
- <text> will be output on the same logical channel the alarm was entered.
If not in multiplex mode, <text> will be output independent of the related
channel.
- The read command returns all pending alarms, independent on which
logical channel an alarm was entered. It´s up to the user to identify these
alarms by specific <text>s.
Example 1:
You may want to configure a reminder call for May 31, 2001, at 9.30h, including
the message "Good Morning".
Write command:
AT+CALA="01/05/31,09:30:00",0,0,"Good Morning"
OK
Do not switch off the GSM engine. When the alarm is executed the ME returns
the following URC:
+CALA: Good Morning
Example 2:
To set a fresh alarm using the same message as in Example 1, simply enter
date and time. <n>, <type>, <text>, <tlength> can be omitted:
AT+CALA="01/05/31,08:50:00"
OK
When the alarm is executed the URC comes with the same message:
+CALA: Good Morning
Examples
Example 3:
To configure the alarm mode, e.g. for May 20, 2001, at 8.30h, enter
AT+CALA="01/05/20,08:30:00"
OK
Next, power down the ME:
AT^SMSO
^SMSO: MS OFF
When the alarm is executed the ME wakes up to Alarm mode and displays a
URC. If available, this line is followed by the individual <text> most recently
saved. If no individual message was saved only the first line appears.
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: Good Morning
Table 6: Summary of AT commands available in Alarm mode
AT command Use
AT+CALA Set alarm time
AT+CCLK Set date and time of RTC
AT^SBC In Alarm mode, you can only query the present current consumption and check
whether or not a charger is connected. The battery capacity is returned as 0, re-
gardless of the actual voltage (since the values measured directly on the cell are
not delivered to the module).
AT^SCTM Query temperature of GSM engine
AT^SMSO Power down GSM engine
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 67 of 256 15.07.2002
4.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax) set or query
Test command
AT+CAMM=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Read command
AT+CAMM?
Response
TA returns the current ACMmax value.
+CAMM: <acmmax> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CAMM=
[<acmax>[,<passwd>]]
Response
TA sets the Advice of Charge related to the accumulated call meter maxi-
mum value in SIM file EF (ACMmax). ACMmax contains the maximum
number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<acmmax> string type; three bytes of the max. ACM value in hexadeci-
mal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000
disable ACMmax feature 000001-FFFFFF
<passwd> string type
SIM PIN2
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 68 of 256 15.07.2002
4.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge information
Test command
AT+CAOC=?
Response
+CAOC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CAOC?
Response
+CAOC: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CAOC=<mode>
Response
TA sets the Advice of Charge supplementary service function mode.
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If <mode>=0, TA returns the current call meter value
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 query CCM value
<ccm> string type; three bytes of the current CCM value in hexadecimal
format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); bytes are simi-
larly coded as ACMmax value in the SIM 000000-FFFFFF
Execute command
AT+CAOC
Response
TA returns the current call meter value
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If <mode>=0, TA returns the current call meter value
+CAOC: <ccm> OK
Parameter
See write command
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 69 of 256 15.07.2002
4.5 AT+CBST Select bearer service type
Test command
AT+CBST=?
Response
+CBST: (list of supported <speed>s),(list of supported <name>s),(list of sup-
ported <ce>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CBST?
Response
+CBST: <speed>,<name>,<ce>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CBST=
<speed>[,<name>
[,<ce>]]
Response
TA selects the bearer service <name>, the data rate <speed> and the connec-
tion element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. The settings also
apply to mobile terminated data calls, especially when single numbering
scheme calls or calls from analog devices are received (see also Chapter
4.45).
OK
Parameter
<speed> 0 auto bauding
4 2400 bps( V.22bis)
6 4800 bps( V.32)
7 9600 bps(V.32)
14 14400 bps (V.34)
68 2400 bps (V.110)
70 4800 bps (V.110)
71 9600 bps (V.110)
75 14400 bps (V.110)
<name> 0 asynchronous modem
<ce> 1 non-transparent
Transparent mode is not supported.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· GSM 02.02[1]: List of allowed combinations of subparameters.
· The PLMN influences the second air interface (to the terminator), therefore
another mode may be established by the network.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 70 of 256 15.07.2002
4.6 AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions control
Test command
AT+CCFC=?
Response
+CCFC: (list/range of supported <reas>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Write command
AT+CCFC=<reas>,
<mode>[,<number>
[,<type>[,<class>
[,<time>]]]]
Response
TA controls the call forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure,
activation, deactivation and status query are supported.
If <mode> ¹ 2 and command successful:
OK
If <mode> = 2, <reas> ¹ 2 and command successful:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type>]
[<CR><LF>+CCFC: ....] OK
If <mode> = 2, <reas> = 2 and command successful:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type> [, <time>]]
[<CR><LF>+CCFC: ....] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<reas> 0 unconditional
1 mobile busy
2 no reply
3 not reachable
4 all call forwarding (includes reasons 0, 1, 2 and 3)
5 all conditional call forwarding (includes reasons 1, 2 and 3)
<mode> 0 disable call forwarding
1 enable call forwarding
2 query status of call forwarding
3 register <number> and activate call forwarding
4 erase <number> and deactivate call forwarding
<number> string type phone number of forwarding address in format speci-
fied by <type>.
If you select <mode> = 3, the phone <number> will be registered
in the network. This allows you to disable / enable CF to the
same destination without the need to enter the phone number
once again. Depending on the services offered by the provider
the registration may be mandatory before CF can be used. The
number remains registered in the network until you register an-
other number or erase it using <mode> = 4.
<type> type of address in integer format; default 145 when dialling string in-
cludes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 71 of 256 15.07.2002
<class> integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of informa-
tion:
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
8 short message service
16 data circuit sync
32 data circuit async
64 dedicated packet access
128 dedicated PAD access
x combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of
the integers 1, 2 and 4 (CF for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is
omitted, the default value 7 is used.
<time> time to wait before call is forwarded, rounded to a multiple of 5 sec..
1...20..30 (only for <reas>=no reply)
<status> 0 not active
1 active
Reference
GSM 07.07,
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.82
Note
· Please note that you can register, disable, enable and erase <reas>
4 and 5 as described above. However, it is not possible to query the status
of <reas> 4 and 5 with AT+CCFC. Instead, you may use the ATD com-
mand followed by *'# codes to check the status of these two reasons. See
Chapter 9.4 for a complete list of *# GSM codes. See also examples be-
low.
· The AT+CCFC command offers a broad range of call forwarding options
according to the GSM specifications. However, when you attempt to set a
call forwarding option which is not provisioned or not yet subscribed to, the
setting will not take effect regardless of the response returned. The re-
sponses in these cases vary with the network (for example “OK”, “Opera-
tion not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.). To make sure check the
call forwarding status with <mode>=2.
· <class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and 128,
that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means, a setting
made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if supported). In
addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific class. For exam-
ple, you can activate Call Forwarding for all data classes, but deactivate it
for a specific data class.
· The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parame-
ters according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of SS “call forward-
ing” to a specific service or service group (a specific <class> value) please
consult table A.1 of GSM 02.04.
4.6.1 Examples: Call forwarding
Please note that when you configure or query call forwarding without specifying any classes, the set-
tings will refer to classes 1, 2 and 4 only (=default). The handling of classes is equivalent to AT+CLCK
(Chapter 4.21.3).
Example 1
To register the destination number for unconditional call forwarding (CFU):
at+ccfc=0,3,"+493012345678",145
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 72 of 256 15.07.2002
Remember that call forwarding will be activated for voice, data and fax (de-
fault classes) when you register the destination number.
Example 2 To query the status of CFU without specifying <class>:
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 1,1,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 1,2,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 1,4,"+493012345678",145
OK
Example 3 To deactivate CFU without specifying <class>:
at+ccfc=0,0
OK
To check whether CFU was successfully deactivated (note that the destina-
tion number remains registered in the network when you disable CFU):
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 0,2,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 0,4,"+493012345678",145
OK
Example 4 To erase the registered CFU destination number:
at+ccfc=0,4
OK
Now, when you check the status, no destination number will be indicated:
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
Example 5 To query the status of CFU for all classes:
at+ccfc=0,2,,,255
+CCFC: 0,1
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
+CCFC: 0,8
+CCFC: 0,16
+CCFC: 0,32
+CCFC: 0,64
+CCFC: 0,128
OK
Example 6 <reas>=4 or 5 cannot be used to query the status of all call forwarding rea-
sons (see also notes above):
at+ccfc=4,2
+CME error: operation not supported
at+ccfc=5,2
+CME error: operation not supported
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 73 of 256 15.07.2002
4.7 AT+CCLK Real Time Clock
Test command
AT+CCLK=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CCLK?
Response
+CCLK: <time>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter:
<time>: string type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss", where characters
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds;
e.g. 6th of May 2001, 22:10:00 hours equals to “01/05/06,22:10:00"
Write command
AT+CCLK=<time>
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter:
<time> see read command
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· <time> is retained if the device enters the Power Down mode via
AT^SMSO (pg. 203).
· <time> is lost if power is totally disconnected and if no separate battery
back-up for the clock is provided via the ZIF cable. In this case, the clock
starts with <time> = “00/01/01,00:00:00” upon next power-up.
· See AT+CALA, pg. 64.
· When the GSM engine wakes up to Alarm mode, the system takes 1s to
re-initialize the RTC and to update the current time. Therefore, it is rec-
ommended to wait 1s before using the AT+CCLK command (for example
1s after ^SYSSTART has been output).
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 74 of 256 15.07.2002
4.8 AT+CCUG: Closed User Group
Test command
AT+CCUG=?
The Test command returns the supported parameters.
Response
+CCUG: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <index>),(list of supported
<info>) OK
Read command
AT+CCUG?
Explicit CUG invocation means that at each call setup, CUG information is
added to the called number.
The Read command returns if the Explicit CUG invocation is activated, which
CUG index is chosen, and if Preferential Group or Outgoing Access is sup-
pressed.
Response
+CCUG: <n>, <index>,<info> OK
Write command
AT+CCUG=
[,<n>[,<index>[,<in
fo>]]
The write command serves to activate or deactivate the explicit CUG invoca-
tion, to set the desired index, and to specify if Preferential Group or Outgoing
Access shall be suppressed.
Parameter
<n> 0 Deactivate explicit CUG invocation
1 Activate explicit CUG invocation
<index> 0...9 CUG index
10 No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
<info> 0 No information
1 Suppress Outgoing Access
2 Suppress preferential CUG
3 Suppress preferential CUG and Outgoing Access.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 02.85
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 75 of 256 15.07.2002
4.9 AT+CCWA Call waiting
Test command
AT+CCWA=?
Response
+CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CCWA?
Response
+CCWA: <n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CCWA=
[<n>,[<mode>
[,<class>]]]
This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service according to
GSM 02.83. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported.
Response
If <mode>=2 and command is successful
+CCWA: <status>, <class1><CR><LF>
+CCWA: <status>, <class2><CR><LF>...
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameters
<n> Sets/shows the presentation mode of URC in the TA
0 disable
1 enable
<mode> When <mode> is not given, network is not interrogated.
0 disable
1 enable
2 query status
<class> Sum of integers each representing a class of information (de-
fault 7). Specifies the class of the active call.
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
7 voice, data and fax (1+2+4)
8 SMS
16 data circuit sync
32 data circuit async
64 dedicated packet access
128 dedicated PAD access
<status> 0 not active
1 active
Unsolicited Result
Code If <n>=1 and the Call Waiting service is enabled the following URC indicates a
waiting call to the TE:
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,,<CLI validity>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 76 of 256 15.07.2002
Parameters of the URC
<number> String type phone number of calling address in format speci-
fied by <type>
<type> Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08
subclause 10.5.4.7)
<class> Indicates the class of the waiting call. See Write command for
possible values.
<CLI validity> 0 CLI valid
1 CLI has been withheld
2 CLI is not available
Reference
GSM 07.07,
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.83
Note
· With the AT+CHLD command, it is possible to establish a multiparty call or
to set the active voice call on hold and then accept a waiting voice call (not
possible with fax and data call). See also AT+CHLD in Chapter 4.16.
· The AT+CCWA command offers a broad range of options according to the
GSM specifications. However, when you attempt to set a <class> which is
not provisioned or not supported for Call Waiting, the setting will not take ef-
fect regardless of the response returned. The responses in these cases vary
with the network (for example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not
supported” etc.). To make sure check the current Call Waiting settings with
<mode>=2.
· <class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and 128,
that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means, a setting
made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if supported). In
addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific class. For example,
you can activate Call Waiting for all data classes, but deactivate it for a spe-
cific data class.
· The AT+CCWA command has been implemented with the full set of <class>
parameters according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of SS “call wait-
ing” to a specific service or service group (a specific <class> value) please
consult table A.1 of GSM 02.04
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 77 of 256 15.07.2002
4.10 AT+CEER Extended error report
Test command
AT+CEER=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CEER
TA returns an extended error report of the reason for the last call release and
location.
Response
+CEER: <location ID>, <reason > , <ss_release>OK
Parameter
<location ID> Location ID as number code (see subclause 9.1.6)
<reason> Reason for last call release as number code (see subclause
9.1.6)
<ss_release> Release cause for last Supplementary Service Call
(see subclause 9.1.14)
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· AT+CEER is not available for data calls, please use ATS18=1.
· Default output in the case of a no-error-situation is +CEER: 0,0,0.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 78 of 256 15.07.2002
4.11 AT+CFUN Set phone functionality
Test command
AT+CFUN=?
Response
+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s), (list of supported <rst>s)
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See below
Read command
AT+CFUN?
Response
+CFUN: <fun>
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See below
Write command
AT+CFUN=[<fun>
[,<rst>]]
The write command can be used to reset the ME, to choose one of the SLEEP
modes or to return to full functionality.
Intended for power saving, SLEEP mode reduces the functionality level of the
ME to a minimum and, thus, minimizes the current consumption. SLEEP mode
falls in two categories: NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode <fun>=0 and CYCLIC
SLEEP modes, selectable as <fun>= 5 or 6.
NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode permanently blocks the serial interface. The CY-
CLIC SLEEP mode, however, is a dynamic process which alternatingly enables
and disables the serial interface. The major benefit of CYCLIC SLEEP mode is
that the serial interface remains accessible and that packet-switched calls can
be done without exiting the SLEEP mode. Also, NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC
SLEEP mode provide different ways to wake up the ME. For details see Chap-
ter 4.11.1.
For CYCLIC SLEEP mode (<fun>=5 or 6) the application must be configured to
use hardware flow control, set with AT\Q3. This is necessary since the CTS
signal is set/reset every time when the ME listens to a paging message from
the base station. This is the way how the module indicates to the application
when the UART is active. For detailed information on the timing of the CTS sig-
nal refer to [1].
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fun> 0 NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the AT interface is not accessible.
Consequently, once you have set <fun> level 0, do not
send further characters. Otherwise these characters remain
in the input buffer and may delay the output of an unsolicited
result code.
The first wake-up event stops power saving and takes the
ME back to full functionality level <fun>=1.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 79 of 256 15.07.2002
1 Full functionality.
If the ME is in one of the two CYCLIC SLEEP modes you
can issue AT+CFUN=1 to stop power saving and return to
full functionality. Keep in mind that, unlike the reset
command described below, this action does not restart the
ME but only changes the level of functionality. See
parameter <rst> for details on the reset.
5 CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 2 seconds after the last character
was sent or received.
6 CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 10 minutes after the last character
was sent or received.
<rst> 0 The <rst> parameter can only be used if the serial interface
is enabled. Due to the command syntax, you need to enter
<fun>, followed by <rst>, where <fun> is only a placeholder
and has no effect. See examples below.
1 ME resets and restarts to full functionality.
After reset and restart, PIN 1 authentication is necessary
(AT+CPIN). If autobauding is enabled it is recommended to
wait 3 to 5 seconds before entering the first AT command.
For details on autobauding refer to Chapter 2.45.1.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· If SLEEP mode (<fun>=0, 5, or 6) is activated while a circuit-switched call is
in progress, this call will immediately be terminated.
· Please keep in mind that power saving works only while the ME is registered
to the GSM network. If you attempt to activate one of the SLEEP modes
while the ME is deregistered, the selected <fun> level will be set, but power
saving does not take effect. Furthermore, in order to accept incoming calls,
SMS or network related URCs in SLEEP mode the ME must be registered
when it enters the SLEEP mode.
· To check that power saving is on, you can query the status with AT+CFUN?,
if you have chosen CYCLIC SLEEP mode. If available, you can take advan-
tage of the status LED controlled by the SYNC pin (see Chapter 8.40 and
[1]. The LED stops flashing once the module starts power saving.
· In Multiplex mode, the CFUN profile is shared by all multiplexer channels.
Example 1
To check the level of functionality use the read command:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 1 Default mode after ME was restarted.
Remember that the AT interface is not accessible in NON-CYCLIC SLEEP
mode. Consequently, the read command is only useful when the ME is set to
full functionality or, when <fun> is set to 5or 6.
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 5 CYCLIC SLEEP mode.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 80 of 256 15.07.2002
Example 2
To set the ME to NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode enter
AT+CFUN=0
OK
When, for example, an SMS is being received and indicated by an unsolicited
result code (URC), the ME wakes up to full operation.
+CMTI: "SM",5 Note that the URC used in this example will appear
only if CMTI=1,1 was configured before. See Chapters
5.10 and 9.1.4.
After this, you may want to verify the operating status:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 1 Indicates that ME has entered full functionality mode.
Example 3 To stop CYCLIC SLEEP mode and return to full functionality:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 5
OK
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Remember that this approach is not applicable to the NON-CYCLIC SLEEP
mode (since the serial interface is disabled). The NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode
ends with the first wake-up event.
Example 4 To reset and restart the ME:
AT+CFUN=1,1 or alternatively, AT+CFUN=0,1 or 5,1 or 6,1
OK
^SYSSTART The ^SYSSTART URC confirms that the ME has been
rebooted.
Note that ^SYSSTART appears only if AT+IPR¹0. If the
ME is in autobaud mode, it is recommended to wait 3 to
5 seconds before entering the first AT command.
Remember to enter the SIM PIN after restart.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 81 of 256 15.07.2002
4.11.1 Wake up the ME from SLEEP mode
A wake-up event is any event that switches off the SLEEP mode and causes the ME to return to full
functionality. In short, it takes the ME back to AT+CFUN=1.
Definitions of the state transitions described in Table 7:
Yes = ME exits SLEEP mode.
No = ME does not exit SLEEP mode.
Table 7: Wake-up events in NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC SLEEP mode
Event From SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=0 to
AT+CFUN=1
From SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=5 or 6 to
AT+CFUN=1
Ignition line No No
/RTS0 (falling edge) Yes No
Unsolicited Result Code (URC) Yes Yes
Incoming voice or data call Yes Yes
Any AT command
(incl. outgoing voice or data call, outgo-
ing SMS)
Not possible
(UART disabled)
No
Incoming SMS depending on mode se-
lected by AT+CNMI:
AT+CNMI=0,0 (= default, no indication
upon receipt of SMS)
AT+CNMI=1,1 (= displays URC upon
receipt of SMS)
No
Yes
No
Yes
GPRS data transfer Not possible
(UART disabled)
No
RTC alarm Yes Yes
AT+CFUN=1 Not possible
(UART disabled)
Yes
Recommendation:
· In NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode, you can set an RTC alarm to wake up the ME and return to full
functionality. This is a useful approach because, in this mode, the AT interface is not accessible.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 82 of 256 15.07.2002
4.12 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification
Test command
AT+CGMI=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CGMI
Response
TA returns manufacturer identification text.
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
See also ”AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification”.
4.13 AT+CGMM Request model identification
Test command
AT+CGMM=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CGMM
Response
TA returns product model identification text.
MC35
OK
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
See also ”AT+GMM Request TA model identification”.
4.14 AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status
Test command
AT+CGMR=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CGMR
Response
TA returns product firmware version identification text.
REVISION xx.yy
OK
xx.yy Version xx and variant yy of software release
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
See also AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 83 of 256 15.07.2002
4.15 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification (IMEI) identical
to GSN
Test command
AT+CGSN=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CGSN
Response
TA returns identification text for determination of the individual ME.
<sn> OK
Parameter
<sn> IMEI of the telephone (International Mobile station Equipment Identity)
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
See also ”AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification”.
4.16 AT+CHLD Call hold and multiparty
Test command
AT+CHLD=?
Response
+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Execute command
AT+CHLD=[<n>]
Response
TA controls the supplementary services Call Hold, MultiParty and Explicit Call
Transfer. Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation
and transferred.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n> 0 Terminate all held calls; or set UDUB (User Determined User
Busy) for a waiting call, i.e. reject the waiting call.
1 Terminate all active calls (if any) and accept the other call
(waiting call or held call)
1X Terminate the active call X (X= 1-7)
2 Place all active calls on hold (if any) and accept the other call
(waiting call or held call) as the active call
2X Place all active calls except call X (X= 1-7) on hold
3 Add the held call to the active calls
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· This supplementary service is only applicable to teleservice 11 (Speech te-
lephony). It is neither possible to put a data or fax call on hold, nor to switch
from a voice call to a waiting data or fax call.
The classes of waiting calls can be easily distinguished if the URC +CCWA:
<number>,<type>,<class>,,<CLI validity> is enabled. See AT+CCWA in
Chapter 4.9.
· The AT+CHLD command offers a broad range of options according to the
GSM specifications. However, many of these options are dependent on the
SIM card / service provider.
· In conflicting situations, e.g. when a waiting call comes while there are already
held calls, the above procedures apply to the waiting call only. For example,
<n>=0 rejects the waiting call, but does not affect the held calls.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 84 of 256 15.07.2002
4.17 AT+CHUP Hang up call
Test command
AT+CHUP=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CHUP
Cancels all active and held calls.
Response
OK/ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT+CHUP implements the same behaviour as ATH (see Chapter 2.12).
4.18 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity
Test command
AT+CIMI=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CIMI
Response
TA returns < IMSI> for identifying the individual SIM which is attached to ME.
<IMSI> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<IMSI> International Mobile Subscriber Identity (string without quotes)
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 85 of 256 15.07.2002
4.19 AT+CIND Indicator control
MC35 supports indicator event reporting for the following items: battery capacity, signal quality, ser-
vice availability, generation of sound in the ME, indication of unread short messages, full SMS stor-
age, call in progress and roaming activities.
There are two ways to display the status and event reports by indicators:
1. You can directly query the current status of each indicator, simply by using the Read command
AT+CIND. The Read command returns the status no matter whether the indicator has been reg-
istered with the Write command AT+CIND=[<stat>[,<stat>[,...]]].
2. You can take advantage of Unsolicited Result Codes. These are the +CIEV URCs which the ME
automatically sends to the application, whenever the value of the associated indicator changes.
The presentation of these URCs depends on two settings:
a) The indicators must be registered with the Write command AT+CIND=[<stat>[,<stat>[,...]]].
By default, all of them are registered. Any URCs you do not need can easily be excluded if
deregistered with <stat>=0.
b) The URC presentation mode must be enabled with AT+CMER (see Chapter 4.26).
Test command
AT+CIND=?
Response
+CIND: (<descr>,(list of supported <ind>s)) [,(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s))[,...]]
Parameters
<descr> values and their <ind> ranges.
"battchg" Battery charge level (0-5),
where (0-5) means 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 or 100 per
cent of the the remaining battery capacity. If no
battery is connected to the ME, then the value will
be always equal to 5. See also Chapter 8.5.
"signal" Signal quality (0-7 or 99 if not measurable). The
indicated value is the bit error rate of the signal
received. See also Chapter 4.46.
"service" Service availability (0-1).
"sounder" Sounder activity (0-1). The indicator provides in-
formation about tones generated in the ME. The
value 1 means for example:
Incoming call - ME is ringing.
Waiting call – ME generates waiting call tone (if
call waiting is enabled).
Outgoing call – ME generates Call Progress tone.
Outgoing call – ME generates BUSY tone.
The value changes to 0, when the tone stops.
"message" Unread short message(s) (0-1).
"call" Call in progress (0-1). Voice und data calls only.
The indicator changes its value as soon as a call
has been established, for example when both in-
terlocutors are connected or when the call ends.
"roam" Roaming indicator (0-1).
"smsfull" A short message memory storage in the MT has
become full (1) or memory locations are available
(0); i.e. the range is (0-1).
<ind> integer type value, in the range stated above for the corresponding
<descr>.
In the list above, all parameters are presented by the sequence used in the Test,
Read and Write commands.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 86 of 256 15.07.2002
Read command
AT+CIND?
Response
TA returns the status of the ME indicators.
+CIND: <ind>[,<ind>[,...]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See Test command
Write command
AT+CIND=
[<stat>[,<stat>
[,...]]]
The Write command simply controls the registration / deregistration of indicators.
<stat> 0 Indicator is deregistered. The indicator cannot be presented as
+CIEV URC, but can be directly queried with AT+CIND?.
1 Indicator is registered, indicator event report is allowed.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
Examples at+cind?
+CIND: 5,99,1,0,0,0,0,0 The battery is either full or an external supply
OK source is used. The bit error rate of the signal
quality is not available (since there no call in
progress), and the ME is registered to its home
network.
at+cmer=2,0,0,2 Activate Indicator Event Report with at+cmer
OK
+CIEV: message,0
+CIEV: battchg,5
+CIEV: signal,99
+CIEV: service,1
+CIEV: sounder,0
+CIEV: call,0
+CIEV: roam,0
+CIEV: smsfull,0
atd"0123456"; You make a call.
OK
+CIEV: sounder,1 A set of +CIEV URCs reports is presented
+CIEV: call,1
+CIEV: sounder,0
+CIEV: call,0 The receiver hangs up.
NO CARRIER
at+cind=,,,0,,0 You deregister the indicators ‘call’ and
OK ‘sounder’
atd"0123456"; You make a call.
OK
NO CARRIER This time, no +CIEV URCs are displayed.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 87 of 256 15.07.2002
4.20 AT+CLCC List current calls of ME
Test command
AT+CLCC=?
Response
OK
Parameters
Execute command
AT+CLCC
Response
TA returns a list of current calls of ME. If command successful, but no calls are
available, no information response is sent to TE.
[+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>,
[<number>,<type>,[<alpha>]]]
[<CR><LF>+CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>,
[<number>,<type>,[<alpha>]]]
[...]]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<idx> Integer type; call identification number as described in GSM
02.30[19] subclause 4.5.5.1; this number can be used in +CHLD
command operations
<dir> 0 mobile originated (MO) call
1 mobile terminated (MT) call
<stat> state of the call:
0 active
1 held
2 dialing (MO call)
3 alerting (MO call)
4 incoming (MT call)
5 waiting (MT call)
<mode> bearer/teleservice:
0 voice
1 data
2 fax
9 unknown
<mpty> 0 call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1 call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type> type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialling string in-
cludes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
<alpha> string type alphanumeric representation of <number> correspond-
ing to the entry found in phonebook; used character set should be
the one selected with command Select TE Character Set +CSCS
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 88 of 256 15.07.2002
4.21 AT+CLCK Facility lock
Test command
AT+CLCK=?
Response
+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>
[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
Use this command to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility
<fac>. The command can be aborted when network facilities are being set or in-
terrogated.
Response
If <mode> ¹ 2 and command is successful
OK
If <mode> = 2 and command is successful
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>
+CLCK: <status>, class2....]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks set by client or factory:
“SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). SIM requests password upon ME power-
up and when this lock command is issued. "SC" lock is protected
with SIM PIN1. The number can be modified with AT+CPWD or
AT^SPWD. See examples in Chapter 4.21.2 for further explana-
tions.
“PS” Phone locked to SIM card. ME requests password when other
than current SIM card is inserted.
If set individually by the client, the password for the "PS" lock
can be specified with AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD.
If set by factory (e.g. for a prepaid mobile), the password is sup-
plied by the provider or operator.
“FD” SIM fixed dialling memory: If the mobile is locked to "FD", only
the phone numbers stored to the "FD" memory can be dialled
(depending on the SIM card, usually up to 7 numbers). PIN2 is
requested as <passwd>.
"CS" Keypad lock (not supported since keypad cannot be directly
connected to the GSM engine)
Note: Primarily intended for the client to take safety precautions, "SC",
"PS" and "FD" can be configured individually. "PS" may also be
factory set.
"PS" lock is frequently referred to as "phone lock", or "device
lock". Accordingly, the password may be called "phone code" or
"device code". The "PS" password is not associated with the
PUK of the SIM card. If incorrectly entered three times, the Mas-
ter Phone Code is required to lift the lock. Once the Master
Phone Code has been acctepted, the mobile is operational, and
the "PS" lock is no longer active. If needed it must be set once
again. See Chapter 4.35.1 and examples below for further de-
tails.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 89 of 256 15.07.2002
Factory set SIM locks
“PF” lock Phone to the very First SIM card
“PN” Network Personalisation
“PU” Network subset Personalisation
“PP” Service Provider Personalisation
“PC” Corporate Personalisation
Note: Typical examples of factory set SIM locks are prepaid phones or
network locks, used to restrict the operation of a mobile to a spe-
cific provider or operator. The client should be aware that each of
these lock types can only be unlocked if the associated pass-
word is available. For example, a mobile can be locked to accept
only SIM cards from the respective provider, or even one single
SIM card. Once a different SIM card is inserted the ME will
prompt the client to enter a specific code. This is not the PUK of
the SIM card, but usually an 8-digit code which needs to be re-
quested from the provider.
The locks can only be set by the manufacturer and need to be
agreed upon between the parties concerned, e.g. provider, op-
erator, distributor etc. on the one side and the manufacturer on
the other side. For details contact your local dealer or Siemens
AG.
See Chapter 4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Supplementary Service: Call barring:
“AO” BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” BOIC (Bar Outgoing International Calls)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
“AI” BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
“AB” All Barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AG” All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AC” All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
Note: The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the
network. To benefit from call barring the client will need to sub-
scribe them, though a limited number of call barring types may
be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected
by a password supplied from the provider or operator. Usually
there is one password which applies to all call barring options.
For details contact your provider.
When you attempt to set a <fac> or <class> which is not provi-
sioned, not yet subscribed to, or not supported by the module,
the setting will not take effect regardless of the response re-
turned. The responses in these cases vary with the network (for
example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not sup-
ported” etc.). To make sure check the call barring status with
<mode>=2.
<mode> 0 unlock
1 lock
2 query status
<passwd> password
See Chapters 4.38 and 8.36 for instructions of how to specify pass-
words.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 90 of 256 15.07.2002
<class> integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of information:
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
8 short message service
16 data circuit sync
32 data circuit async
64 dedicated packet access
128 dedicated PAD access
x combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of the
integers 1, 2 and 4 (call barring for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is
omitted, the default value 7 is used.
See examples in 4.21.3 for correct handling of class numbers.
<class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and
128, that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means,
a setting made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if
supported). In addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific
class. For example, you can activate call barring for all data classes,
but deactivate it for a specific data class.
<status> 0 off
1 on
Reference
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.88
Note
The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parameters
according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of a specific <fac> to a specific
service or service group (a specific <class> value) please consult table A.1 of
GSM 02.04.
4.21.1 Examples: Enabling / disabling PIN 1 authentication
Example 1
To lock or unlock the SIM card: The "SC" parameter enables or disables the
SIM PIN authentication (PIN 1) when you power up the GSM engine:
AT+CLCK="SC",1,9999 Activates SIM card lock.
OK As a result, SIM PIN 1 must be entered to en-
able ME to register to the GSM network.
AT+CLCK="SC",0,9999 Unlocks SIM card.
OK When powered up, ME registers to the GSM
network without requesting SIM PIN1.
Note: Depending on the services offered by the
provider, this feature is not supported by all
SIM card types. If so, the command returns
ERROR when you attempt to unlock the card.
Example 2 To query the status of the SIM card lock:
AT+CLCK="SC",2
+clck: 1 SIM card is locked. SIM PIN1 must be entered
to enable ME to register to the GSM network.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 91 of 256 15.07.2002
4.21.2 Examples: Phone lock
Example 1
Be sure that PIN 1 authentication is valid:
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
OK
AT+CPIN=9999
OK
To lock the mobile to the currently inserted SIM card, first specify a password (=
a phone code):
AT+CPWD="PS",,1234 If "PS" lock has not been set before: enter new
OK password.
or:
AT+CPWD="PS",1234,3333 To replace existing "PS" password: Enter old
OK and new one.
Then, activate the phone lock:
AT+CLCK="PS",1,3333 Locks the mobile to the current SIM card.
OK
Example 2
To deactivate the phone lock:
AT+CLCK="PS",0,3333 Enter lock type "PS", followed by 0 to lift the
OK lock. Then type "PS" lock password.
As a result, the mobile accepts any SIM card and can be operated after the
card's SIM PIN 1 was entered.
Example 3 To operate the mobile with the SIM card for which "PS" lock was activated:
AT+CPIN? Enter SIM PIN used when locking the mobile.
+CPIN: SIM PIN "PS"lock password is not needed.
AT+CPIN=9999
OK
Example 4 To operate the mobile with other SIM card than the one used for the "PS" lock:
Enter SIM PIN of present card, followed by "PS" lock password.
AT+CPIN? Enter SIM PIN of present SIM card.
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=1111
OK SIM PIN accepted.
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN "PS" lock password is required.
AT+CPIN=3333
OK "PS" lock password has been accepted.
Example 5 Attempt to unblock the "PS" lock using an invalid password:
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 92 of 256 15.07.2002
AT+CPIN? Enter SIM PIN of present SIM card.
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=1111
OK SIM PIN accepted.
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN "PS" lock password is required.
AT+CPIN=4444 Bad password is given:
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
After the "PS" lock password was incorrectly entered three times in a row:
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PUK Master Phone Code is required (8-digit code
available from the manufacturer. See Chapter
4.35.1).
AT+CPIN=12345678 Master Phone Code has been accepted. As a
result, the mobile is operational, and the "PS"
lock is totally removed. If needed, it must be set
once again.
Example 6 Attempt to unblock the "PS" lock using an invalid Master Phone Code: Due to
the timing algorithm explained in Chapter 4.35.1 the intervals between each at-
tempt are getting longer. See also AT^SPIC in Chapter 8.32.
Example 7 As an alternative to the AT+CPIN command you can use AT+CPWD. In this
case the following syntax shall be observed: AT+CPWD=PS,Master Phone
Code[,new password].
AT+CPWD=PS,12345678 Deactivates the "PS" lock.
Or
AT+CPWD=PS,12345678,3333 Deactivates the present "PS" lock
and sets a new "PS" lock.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 93 of 256 15.07.2002
4.21.3 Examples: Call barring
Please note that when you configure or query call barring without specifying any classes, the settings
will refer to classes 1, 2 and 4 only (default setting).
Remember that most of the call barring types have to be subscribed to. Usually, the service is subject
to a password supplied from the provider.
Example 1
When checking the status of barring for outgoing international calls without
specifying classes, please note that the ME returns only the status of voice,
data, fax calls. The status of SMS and other classes is not reported.
at+clck=oi,2,0000 or without <passwd>: at+clck=oi,2
+CLCK: 1,1 outgoing international voice calls barred
+CLCK: 1,2 outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 1,4 outgoing international fax calls barred
OK
Example 2 To check the call barring status for outgoing international calls and all classes,
you are required to enter the integer sum referring to all classes:
at+clck=oi,2,0000,255 or without <passwd>: at+clck=oi,2,,255
+CLCK: 1,1 outgoing international voice calls barred
+CLCK: 1,2 outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 1,4 outgoing international fax calls barred
+CLCK: 1,8 outgoing international SMS barred
+CLCK: 0,16 no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
+CLCK: 1,32 outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 0,64 no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
+CLCK: 0,128 no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
OK
Example 3 To activate call barring for outgoing international voice and data calls:
at+clck=oi,1,0000,3 (where 3 is the sum of class 1 + class 2)
OK
Example 4 To disable call barring for outgoing international fax (class 4) and SMS (class 8)
calls:
at+clck=oi,0,0000,12 (where 12 is the sum of class 4 + class 8)
OK
Example 5 To disable call barring for all outgoing international calls:
at+clck=oi,0,0000,255
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 94 of 256 15.07.2002
4.22 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation
This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presenta-
tion) that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when re-
ceiving a mobile terminated call.
Test command
AT+CLIP=?
Response
+ CLIP: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CLIP?
Response
+CLIP: <n>, <m> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CLIP=<n>
Set command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE. It has no
effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n> 0 suppress unsolicited result codes
1 display unsolicited result codes
<m> 0 CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2 unknown
Unsolicited result
code When CLIP is enabled at the TE (and is permitted by the calling subscriber), an
unsolicited result code is returned after every RING (or +CRING: <type>) at a
mobile terminating call.
Voice call response format:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,,,,<CLI validity>
Data/FAX call response format:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>
Parameter
<number> string type phone number of calling address in format specified by
<type>
<type> type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialling string in-
cludes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129.
<CLI validity>
0 CLI valid
1 CLI has been withheld by the originator.
3 CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations
of originating network. <number> shall be an empty string ("")
and <type> value will not be significant.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 95 of 256 15.07.2002
4.23 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction (by *# sequence)
The AT+CLIR command is not supported. Instead, you can handle CLIR on a call-by-call basis using
the ATD command and a *# sequence
Read command
ATD*#31#
Run the Read command to query status:
Response
+CLIR: <n>,<m>
Defined values
<n> (parameter shows the settings for outgoing calls):
0 presentation indicator is used according to the
subscription of the CLIR service
1 CLIR invocation
2 CLIR suppression
<m> (parameter shows the subscriber CLIR service status in
the network):
0 CLIR not provisioned
1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2 unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
Execute commands
ATD*31#<Phonenumber>[;]
ATD#31#<Phonenumber>[;]
The Execute commands allow you to enable or disable the presenta-
tion of your phone number to the called party when you set up a call:
Deactivate CLIR = enable presentation of own phone number
to called party
Activate CLIR = suppress presentation of own phone number to
called party
Note:
<Phonenumber> = phone number of called party
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 96 of 256 15.07.2002
4.24 AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level
Test command
AT+CLVL=?
Response
+CLVL: (list of supported <level>s)OK
Read command
AT+CLVL?
Response
+CLVL: <level>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
AT+CLVL=<level>
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<level> Loudspeaker Volume Level (0-4)
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· The write command can only be used in audio mode 2 – 6.
· The values of the volume steps are specified with the parameters
<outCalibrate[0]>,...<outCalibrate[4]> of the AT^SNFO command (see
Chapter 8.24).
· As an alternative to AT+CLVL, you can use AT^SNFO and AT^SNFV
(Chapter 8.27). The parameter <level> is identical with <outStep>
used by both commands.
· Any change to <level> (or <outStep>) takes effect in audio modes 2 to
6. That is, when you change <level> (or <outStep>) and then select
another mode with AT^SNFS, the same step will be applied.
The only exception is audio mode 1 which is fixed to <level>=4 (or ac-
cordingly <outStep>=4).
· <level> (or <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered
down with AT^SMSO or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 97 of 256 15.07.2002
4.25 AT+CMEE Report mobile equipment error
Test command
AT+CMEE=?
Response
+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CMEE?
Response
+CMEE: <n> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CMEE=<n>
This command controls the presentation of the result codes +CME ERROR:
<err> and CMS:<err> that indicate errors relating to ME functionality.
When you power down or reset the ME with AT+CFUN=1,1 the setting will be re-
set to its default. The levels 1 or 2 need to be selected every time you reboot the
ME, or may be included, for permanent use, in the user profile saved with AT&W.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> 0 disable result code (only 'ERROR' will be displayed)
1 enable result code and use numeric values
2 enable result code and use verbose values
Example To obtain enhanced error messages it is recommended to choose <n>=2.
AT+CMEE=2
OK
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· The possible error result codes are listed in chapter 9
· In multiplex mode (see “AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode”, pg. 101) the set-
ting applies only to the logical channel where selected. The setting on the
other channels may differ.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 98 of 256 15.07.2002
4.26 AT+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting
Test command
AT+CMER=?
Response
+CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported
<disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
Parameters
See write command
Read command
AT+CMER?
Response
+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT+CMER=
[<mode>
[,<keyp>
[,<disp> [,<ind>
[,<bfr>]]]]]
The Execute command enables and disables the presentation of Unsolicited Re-
sult Codes for event reporting. MC35 supports only the type +CIEV (indicator
event reporting). If enabled the +CIEV URCs are sent whenever the value of an
indicator changes.
Response
OK
Parameters
<mode> 0 Discard CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes
1 Discard CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes when TA-TE link is
reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode); otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
2 Buffer CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes in the TA when TA-TE
link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to
the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the
TE.
3 Forward CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes directly to the TE; TA-
TE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes
and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<keyp> 0 No keypad event reporting
<disp> 0 No display event reporting
<ind> 0 No indicator event reporting
2 Indicator event reporting using result code
+CIEV: <desc>,<value>
<desc> indicates the indicator’s name and <value> is the new
value of this indicator. All indicator events shall be directed
from TA to TE.
<bfr> 0 TA buffer of Unsolicited Result Codes defined within this
command; is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered
Unsolicited Result Code:
+CIEV: <desc>,<value>
Parameters
<descr> values and their <value> ranges:
"battchg" Battery charge level (0-5),
where (0-5) means 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 or 100 per
cent of the the remaining battery capacity. If no
battery is connected to the ME, then the value will
be always equal to 5. See also Chapter 8.5.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 99 of 256 15.07.2002
"signal" Signal quality (0-7 or 99 if not measurable). The
indicated value is the bit error rate of the signal
received. See also Chapter 4.46.
"service" Service availability (0-1).
"sounder" Sounder activity (0-1). The indicator provides in-
formation about tones generated in the ME. The
value 1 means for example:
Incoming call - ME is ringing.
Waiting call – ME generates waiting call tone (if
call waiting is enabled).
Outgoing call – ME generates Call Progress tone.
Outgoing call – ME generates BUSY tone.
The value changes to 0, when the tone stops.
"message" Unread short message(s) (0-1).
"call" Call in progress (0-1). Voice und data calls only.
The indicator changes its value as soon as a call
has been established, for example when both in-
terlocutors are connected or when the call ends.
"roam" Roaming indicator (0-1).
"smsfull" A short message memory storage in the MT has
become full (1) or memory locations are available
(0); i.e. the range is (0-1).
<value> integer type value, in the range stated above for the corresponding
<descr>.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· Only the indicators which are registered (see AT+CIND command), will be re-
ported if CMER is enabled.
· After CMER has been switched on, +CIEV URCs for all registered indicators
with their default value will be presented to the TE.
· While the ME is in online data mode, no URC will be displayed. Each +CIEV
URC is replaced with a Break (100 ms), and is stored in a buffer. Once the ME
goes into command mode (after +++ was entered), all URCs stored in the
buffer will be output.
Exception: For “message” indicator, please note that each incoming short mes-
sage will cause a Break.
· See AT+CIND in Chapter 4.19.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 100 of 256 15.07.2002
4.27 AT+CMUT Mute control
Test command
AT+CMUT=?
Response
+CMUT: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read command
AT+CMUT?
Response
+CMUT: <n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
AT+CMUT=<n>
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<n>: 0 mute off
1 mute on
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
This command can be used in all audio modes (1 to 6) and during a voice
call only. See AT^SNFS in Chapter 8.26 for more details on the various
audio modes.
Users should be aware that when they switch back and forth between dif-
ferent audio modes the value of <mute> does not change. This means
that the status of mute operaton is retained until explicitly changed.
As alternative, you can use the AT^SNFM command described in Chap-
ter 8.22.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 101 of 256 15.07.2002
4.28 AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode
MC35 supports Multiplex mode according to the GSM 07.10 Multiplexer Protocol and enables one
physical serial asynchronous interface to be partitioned into three virtual channels. This allows you
to take advantage of up to 3 simultaneous sessions running on the serial interface. Each session
represents a stream of bytes conveying various data; such as voice, fax, data, SMS, phonebook in-
formation, battery status etc. For example, you can transfer data over one channel while two further
channels are free to control the GSM engine with AT commands. It should be noted, however, that
voice, data, fax or GPRS calls cannot be established simultaneously, since the mobile device pro-
vides just one air interface to the network.
To make the three virtual interfaces (channels) available, both the MC35 module and the customer
application must contain Mux components which communicate over the Multiplexer Protocol. In the
MC35 module, the Mux/MP software is already incorporated. The customer application should either
integrate the MC35 Mux/MP software or include a Mux/MP program developed by the customer. The
AT+CMUX write command starts the multiplexing protocol control channel.
Refer to [5] which provides to a detailed description of the Multiplex functionality implemented in
MC35 and step-by-step instructions of how to install and configure the MUX mode. The source files
of the MC35 Mux/MP software can be supplied on request. Please contact your local dealer to ob-
tain the latest installation software and user's guide.
Test command
AT+CMUX=?
Response
+CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Read command
AT+CMUX?
Response
+CMUX: <mode> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write command
AT+CMUX=<mode>
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<mode> multiplexer transparency mechanism
0 basic option
Subparameters defined in GSM07.07 are adjusted for control and logical
channels as follows:
<subset> 0 UIH frames used only (control channel)
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
1. The write command is used to enter the multiplex mode. The setup of
the logical channels is initiated by the TE, i.e. the TE acts as initiator.
This means that the TE shall ensure that logical channels are estab-
lished before any further actions on the channels can be started.
2. There is a timeout of five seconds, if the multiplexer protocol is enabled
and no multi
p
lexer control channel is established. The GSM en
g
ine re-
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 102 of 256 15.07.2002
turns to the AT command mode.
3. There are various options to switch from data mode to command mode:
a) Escape sequence +++
b) Circuit 108/2 (DTR) changes from ON to OFF, reaction depends on
command at&d (caution if AT&D0: TA ignores status on DTR).
c) The message Modem Status Command (MSC) for control channel is
defined by the multiplexer protocol GSM07.10. MSC conveys V.24
signals. Bit 3 of Control Signal Octet is DTR, reaction depends on
command at&d (caution if AT&D0: TA ignores status on DTR).
4. The parameter maximum frame size (N1) of AT+CMUX in GSM07.07 is
fixed to 97 and cannot be changed. All other parameters are not avail-
able.
5. Multiplex mode can be terminated by AT^SMSO (,AT^SMSO Switch off
mobile station" pg. 202). It has to be reestablished after power-on.
4.28.1 Restricted use of AT commands in Multiplex mode
In Multiplex mode, the operation of several AT commands varies from the normal mode. This chapter
summarizes the concerned commands. For general rules and restrictions to be considered in Multiplex
mode please refer to [5].
Data, fax and GPRS calls can only be set up on logical channel 1. Due to this restriction, AT com-
mands have a different behaviour on channels 2+3 compared to channel 1. Several commands are
not available, others return different responses. These commands are listed in the table below:
Table 8: Availability of AT commands on virtual channels
Command Behaviour on channel 1 Differences on channel 2+3
+++ as described3) no data calls
ATE as described as described
AT+CBST as described not usable
AT+CR as described not usable
AT+CRLP as described not usable
AT+CG... (GPRS commands) as described usage not recommended 2)
AT+F.... (Fax commands) as described not usable
AT&C as described not usable
AT&D as described not usable
AT&F as described data call parameters not changed,
S3, S4 not changed
AT&S as described not usable
AT&V as described data call parameters not displayed
ATA as described no data calls
ATD as described no data calls
ATDI<n> as described not usable
ATO as described not usable
ATS0 1) as described not usable
ATS3 1) as described as described
ATS4 1) as described as described
ATS5 1) as described not usable
ATS6 1) as described not usable
ATS7 1) as described not usable
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 103 of 256 15.07.2002
Command Behaviour on channel 1 Differences on channel 2+3
ATS8 1) as described not usable
ATS10 1) as described not usable
ATS18 1) as described not usable
AT\Q<n> as described not usable
ATZ as described data call parameters not changed
1) Siemens GSM engines support the registers S0 - S29. You can change S0, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,S8,
S10 and S18 using the related ATSn commands (see starting from pg. 32).
2) MC35 allows to use the GPRS commands on all logical channels, but to remain compatible to fu-
ture releases it is recommended to use them on channel 1 only. PDP contexts can be defined on
any channel, but are visible and usable only on the channel on which they are defined (thus it is
not possible to define a context on channel 2 and activate it on channel 3). GPRS data calls can be
initiated on any channel but will be always established on channel 1.
3) The applicability of the +++ escape sequence depends on the customer’s external application
based on the Mulitplexer Protocol. Recommendations for implementing an appropriate modem
status command (MSC) are provided in [5], Chapter “Escape Sequence”. The demo program PC
MUX uses +++ as described in Chapter 2.2.
Table 9: Summary of AT commands with different behaviour in Multiplex mode
Command Description Chapter
AT\Q<n> It is recommended to use hardware flow control (AT\Q3). XON/XOFF
flow control (AT\Q1) is not supported in Multiplex mode
2.3
ATH Terminates any voice, fax or CSD call in progress, no matter what
channel was used to enter ATH.
Terminates GPRS connections or clears active PDP context if issued
on the same channel.
2.12
AT&V Different default configurations on channels 1, 2 and 3 2.37
AT+IPR Before you start Multiplex mode, it is recommended to set the ME to
57600 bps. For GPRS we suggest to use 115200 bps .
The bit rate cannot be changed while Multiplex mode is active, there-
fore do not use AT+IPR=<rate> in this mode.
2.45
AT+IPR=0 Autobauding is not compatible with Multiplex mode. It is neither pos-
sible to start MUX when autobauding is active, nor to set autobauding
during Multiplex mode.
2.45.1
AT+CALA Alarm calls can be separately configured on each channel. The read
command returns the total number of alarm calls activated on all
channels.
4.2
AT+CMEE Presentation mode can be separately configured for each channel. 4.25
AT+CNMA If Multiplex mode is activated the +CNMI parameter will be set to zero
on all channels, if one channel fails to acknowledge an incoming
message within the required time.
5.9
AT+CNMI Phase 2+ parameters can only be used on one channel. The parame-
ter for <mt> and <ds> on the other channels have to be set to zero. If
either a SM or a Status Report is not acknowledged, all +CNMI pa-
rameter will be set to zero on all channels.
5.10
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 104 of 256 15.07.2002
4.29 AT+COPN Read operator names
Test command
AT+COPN=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+COPN
TA returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <nu-
mericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory is
returned.
Response
+COPN: numeric <numeric1>,long alphanumeric <alpha1><CR><LF>
+COPN:.....OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<numericn> string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area iden-
tification number
<alphan> string type; operator in long alphanumeric format; can contain
up to 16 characters
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
See also AT^SPLM, pg. 217
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 105 of 256 15.07.2002
4.30 AT+COPS Operator selection
This command can be used to query the present status of the ME's network registration and to de-
termine whether automatic or manual network selection shall be used.
Automatic mode: Lets the ME automatically search for the home operator. If successful the ME
registers to the home network and enters the IDLE mode. If the home network
is not found, ME goes on searching. If then a permitted operator is found, ME
registers to this operator. If no operator is found the ME remains unregistered.
Manual mode: Desired operator can be manually entered, using the AT+COPS write com-
mand syntax. If operator is found, ME registers to this operator. If the selected
operator is forbidden, the ME remains unregistered.
Manual/automatic: In this mode, the ME first tries to find the operator that was manually entered.
If the ME fails to register to this operator, then it starts to select automatically
another network.
Test command
AT+COPS=?
TA returns a list of quadruplets, each representing an operator present in the
network. The list of operators is presented in the following order: Home net-
work, networks referenced in SIM, and other networks. Two commas in a
succession (,,) are a placeholder for the non-implemented <format>1 (short
alphanumeric operator name).
Response
+COPS: (list of supported (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>,, numeric
<oper>s) [,(list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <format>s)] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<stat> 0 unknown
1 operator available
2 current operator (registered)
3 forbidden operator
<oper> operator as per <format>
<mode> 0 - 4 see write command
<format> 0 - 2 see write command
Read command
AT+COPS?
TA returns the current mode and, if registered, the currently used operator. If
the ME is unregistered, <format> and <oper> are omitted.
Response
+COPS: <mode>[, <format>[, <oper>]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT+COPS=
<mode>
[,<format>[,<oper>]]
The write command allows you to choose whether the GSM network operator
is to be selected automatically or manually. When using the manual mode, the
<operator> must be entered, no matter whether you want to search for the
home operator or another one.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 106 of 256 15.07.2002
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<mode> 0 automatic mode; <oper> field is ignored
1 manual operator selection
<oper> field must be present, <format> can only be = 2
2 manually deregister from network and remain unregistered
until mode 0,1,4 is selected
3 set <format> for read command +COPS?
4 combination of manual/automatic mode;
if manual selection fails, ME switches to automatic mode
(<mode>=0). (<oper> field must be present)
<oper> operator as per <format>
<format> 0 long format alphanumeric <oper>; up to 16 characters
2 numeric <oper>; GSM Location Area Identification number
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
Example 1 To query the present status of ME's network registration using the test com-
mand:
AT+COPS=?
+COPS: (2,"D2",,"26202"),(3,"E-Plus",,"26203"),(3,"T-
D1",,"26201"),(3,"Interkom",,"26207"),,(0-4),(0,2)
OK
Registered operator is D2. The other operators are present in the network, but
not allowed to be used with the current SIM card.
To query the status of the ME's network registration using the read command:
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 0,0,"D2" (command returns mode, format, registered operator)
OK
Example 2 Attempt to manually select a forbidden operator:
AT+COPS=1,2,26203
OK
If the selected operator was not allowed, the ME is now unregistered. The
read command will return only the mode, but no operator:
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 1
In this case, the test command returns only that the desired operator is avail-
able (<stat=1). Nevertheless, the registration is not successful. Please use the
AT+CREG command (Chapter 4.41) to verify the registration status.
AT+COPS=?
+COPS: (1,"D2",,"26202"),(3,"E-Plus",,"26203"),(3,"T-
D1",,"26201"),(3,"Interkom",,"26207"),,(0-4),(0,2)
OK
AT+CREG?
+CREG: 0,3 (where 3 = registration denied)
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 107 of 256 15.07.2002
4.31 AT+CPAS Mobile equipment activity status
Test command
AT+CPAS=?
Response
+CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT+CPAS
Response
TA returns the activity status of ME.
+CPAS: <pas> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<pas> 0 ready
3 incoming call (ringing)
4 call in progress or call hold
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 108 of 256 15.07.2002
4.32 AT+CPBR Read current phonebook entries
Test command
AT+CPBR=?
Response
TA returns location range supported by the current storage as a compound value
and the maximum length of <number> and <text> fields.
Note:
If SIM storage is selected, the length may not be available. If storage does not of-
fer format information, the format list should be empty parentheses.
+CPBR: (list of supported <index>s), <nlength>, <tlength> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<index> supported range of location numbers (maximum number de-
pends on storage type)
<nlength> max. length of phone number, normally 20, for a small num-
ber of locations 40
<tlength> max. length of text assigned to phone number (depending on
storage type 16 - 18 characters including blanks)
Execute command
AT+CPBR=<ind
ex1>[,<index2>]
Response
TA returns phonebook entries in location number range <index1> ... <index2>
from the current phonebook memory storage selected with +CPBS. If <index2> is
left out, only location <index1> is returned.
+CPBR: <index1>, <number>, <type>, <text>[<CR><LF>+CPBR: .....+CPBR: <in-
dex2>, <number>, <type>, <text>] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR
Parameter
<index1> location number where reading starts
<index2> location number where reading ends
<number> phone number
<type> type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialling string
includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129.
<text> string type field of maximum length <tlength>. Character set as
specified with +CSCS.
Example 1. First, run the Test command to find out the maximum range of entries stored
in the active phonebook:
AT+CPBR=?
TA returns the supported values in the format: +CPBR: (1-100),20,17 where
100 is the supported range of location numbers, 20 is the length of the phone
number and 17 is the maximum length of the text associated text.
2. Now, run the Execute command to display the phonebook entries sorted by
location numbers.
AT+CPBR =1,100
+CPBR 1,"+999999",145,"Charlie"
+CPBR: 2,"+777777",145,"Bill"
+CPBR: 3,"+888888",145,"Arthur" .........
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 109 of 256 15.07.2002
4.33 AT+CPBS Select phonebook memory storage
Test command
AT+CPBS=?
Response
+CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CPBS?
Response
TA returns currently selected memory:
+CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CPBS=
<storage>
Response
TA selects current phonebook memory storage, which is used by other phone-
book commands.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<storage> “SM” SIM phonebook (storage depends on SIM Card)
“FD” SIM fixdialling phonebook (FD Phonebook storage pos.1-7).
If the mobile is locked to FD, only the numbers stored to the
FD memory can be dialled. To edit the FD phonebook PIN 2
is required. See AT+CLCK Facility lock, AT^SLCK Facility
lock and AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2.
“LD” SIM last-dialling-phonebook (LD Phonebook storage pos.1-
10) (+CPBW not be applicable to this storage)
“MC” ME missed (unanswered received) calls) (MC Phonebook
storage pos.1-10) list (+CPBW not applicable to this storage
“RC” ME received calls list (+CPBW not applicable for this stor-
age) (RC Phonebook storage pos.1-10)
“ON” SIM (or ME) own numbers (MSISDNs) list
“ME” ME Phonebook (storage pos.1-50)
<used> Integer type value indicating the number of used locations in se-
lected memory
<total> Integer type value indicating the maximum number of locations al-
lowed in the selected memory
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
This command can be used right after power-on to get selected <storage>.
Since data need to be loaded from the SIM, values of <used> and <total> might
not be available for the first 20 seconds.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 110 of 256 15.07.2002
4.34 AT+CPBW Write phonebook entry
Test command
AT+CPBW=?
Response
TA returns location range supported by the current storage, the maximum
length of <number> field, supported number formats of the storage and the
maximum length of <text> field.
Note: The length may not be available while SIM storage is selected. If storage
does not offer format information, the format list should be empty parenthe-
sises.
+CPBW: (list of supported <index>s), <nlength>, (list of supported <type>s),
<tlength> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command.
Write command
AT+CPBW=
[<index>]
[,<number>
[[,<type>]
[,<text>]]]
This command writes a phonebook entry to the memory location <index> of the
active memory.
The memory location number <index> is followed by the phone number <num-
ber> (in the format <type>) and the associated <text>.
If writing fails, an ME error +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Parameter
<index> Location number within phonebook memory, total range is given
in test command response
<number> Phone number, maximum length is given as <nlength> in test
command response
<type> Type of phone number (address octet in integer format); 145 when
dialling string includes international access code character “+”,
otherwise 129 (refer GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)
<text> Text assigned to the phone number, maximum length is given in
test command response <tlength>. Character set as specified with
+CSCS. See note below.
<nlength> Max. length of phone number, normally 20, for a small number of
locations 40
<tlength> Max. length of text assigned to phone number (depending on
storage type 16 - 18 characters including blanks)
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
To delete a phonebook entry simply enter the location number:
AT+CPBW=<index>
To write a phonebook entry to the first free location number:
AT+CPBW=,<number>,<type>,<text>
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
If <text> contains characters which are coded differently in ASCII and GSM
(e.g. Ä, Ö, Ü), these characters have to be entered via escape sequences as
described in Chapter 1.5.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 111 of 256 15.07.2002
4.35 AT+CPIN Enter PIN
Test command
AT+CPIN=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CPIN?
Response
TA returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether or not a password is re-
quired.
+CPIN: <code> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<code>
SIM PIN authentication
READY PIN has already been entered. No further entry
needed.
SIM PIN ME is waiting for SIM PIN1.
SIM PUK ME is waiting for SIM PUK1 if PIN1 was dis-
abled after three failed attempts to enter PIN1.
SIM PIN2 ME is waiting for PIN2, when the attempt to ac-
cess PIN2 requiring features was acknowledged
with +CME ERROR:17 (e.g. if client attempts to
edit the FD phonebook).
SIM PUK2 ME is waiting for PUK2 to unblock a disabled
PIN2. Necessary if preceding command was ac-
knowledged with error +CME ERROR:18.
Phone security locks set by client or factory
PH-SIM PIN ME is waiting for phone-to-SIM card password if
"PS" lock is active and user inserts other SIM
card than the one used for the lock. ("PS" lock is
also referred to as phone or antitheft lock).
PH-SIM PUK ME is waiting for Master Phone Code, if the
above "PS" lock password was incorrectly en-
tered three times.
Factory set SIM locks
PH-FSIM PIN ME is waiting for phone-to-very-first-SIM card.
Necessary when "PF" lock was set. When pow-
ered up the first time, ME locks itself to the first
SIM card put into the card holder. As a result,
operation of the mobile is restricted to this one
SIM card (unless the PH-FSIM PUK is used as
described below).
PH-FSIM PUK ME is waiting for phone-to-very-first-SIM card
unblocking password to be given. Necessary
when "PF" lock is active and other than first SIM
card is inserted.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 112 of 256 15.07.2002
PH-NET PIN ME is waiting for network personalisation pass-
word
PH-NET PUK ME is waiting for network personalisation un-
blocking password
PH-NS PIN ME is waiting for network subset personalisation
password
PH-NS PUK ME is waiting for network subset unblocking
password
PH-SP PIN ME is waiting for service provider personalisa-
tion password
PH-SP PUK ME is waiting for service provider personalisa-
tion unblocking password
PH-C PIN ME is waiting for corporate personalisation
password
PH-C PUK ME is waiting for corprorate personalisation un-
blocking password
See Chapters 4.21 and 8.13 for information on lock types.
Write command
AT+CPIN=<pin>
[,<new pin>]
Response
The write command lets the ME store the entered password. This may be for
example the SIM PIN1 to register to the GSM network, or the SIM PUK1 to re-
place a disabled PIN with a new one, or the PH-SIM PIN if the client has taken
precautions for preventing damage in the event of loss or theft etc. See above
for the list of passwords.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no PIN request is pending (for example if PIN authentication has been done
and the same PIN is entered again) ME responds +CME ERROR: operation not
allowed. No action is required from your part.
Parameter
<pin> password (string type), usually SIM PIN1.
If the requested password was a PUK, such as SIM PUK1 or PH-
SIM PUK or PH-FSIM PUK or another password, then <pin> must
be followed by <newpin>.
<new pin> if the requested code was a PUK: specify a new password or re-
store the former disabled password. See Chapter 4.35.1 for more
information about when you may need to enter the PUK.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· Caution: After entering a password with AT+CPIN all other commands that
need access to data on the SIM card may be blocked for up to 20 seconds!
· Successful PIN authentication only confirms that the entered PIN was rec-
ognized and correct. The output of the result code OK does not necessarily
imply that the mobile is registered to the desired network.
Typical example: PIN was entered and accepted with OK, but the ME fails
to register to the network. This may due to missing network coverage, de-
nied network access with currently used SIM card, no valid roaming agree-
ment between home network and currentl
y
available o
p
erators etc.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 113 of 256 15.07.2002
MC35 offers various options to verify the present status of network registra-
tion: For example, the AT+COPS? (Chapter 4.30) command indicates the
currently used network. With AT+CREG (Chapter 4.41) you can also check
the current status and activate an unsolicited result code which appears
whenever the status of the network registration changes (e.g. when the ME
is powered up, or when the network cell changes).
· Wait 10 seconds after PIN input before using SMS related commands.
· <pin> and <new pin> can also be entered in quotation marks (e.g. ”1234”).
· To check the number of remaining to attempts to enter the passwords use
the AT^SPIC command. See Chapter 8.32.
· See also Chapter 9.2 “Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands“.
· See Chapters 4.38 and 8.36 for information on passwords.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 114 of 256 15.07.2002
4.35.1 What to do if PIN or password authentication fails?
PIN1 / PUK1: After three failures to enter PIN 1, the SIM card is blocked (except for emergency
calls). To unblock the SIM card, the client needs to enter the associated PUK (= PIN
Unblocking Key / Personal Unblocking Key). After ten failed attempts to enter the
PUK, the SIM card will be invalidated and no longer operable. In such a case, the card
needs to be replaced.
To unblock a disabled PIN1, use the AT+CPIN command and enter the PUK when
prompted by the response +CME ERROR: 12. Alternatively, you can use the ATD
command followed by the GSM code **05*PUK*newPIN*newPIN#.
PIN2 / PUK2: PIN2 prevents unauthorized access to the features listed in Chapter 4.36. The han-
dling of PIN2 varies with the provider. PIN2 may either be a specific code supplied
along with an associated PUK2, or a default code such as 0000. In either case, the
client is advised to replace it with an individual code. Incorrect input of PUK2 will per-
manently block the additional features subject to PIN2 authentification, but usually has
no affect on PIN1.
To unblock a disabled PIN2, use the AT+CPIN command and enter the PUK2 when
prompted by the response +CPIN: SIM PUK2 or after the equivalent error code: +CME
ERROR: 18 was returned. Alternatively, you can use the ATD command followed by
the GSM code **052*PUK*newPIN*newPIN#.
Phone lock: If the mobile was locked to a specific SIM card (= "PS" lock or phone lock), the PUK
that came with the SIM card cannot be used to remove the lock. After three failed at-
tempts to enter the correct password, ME returns +CPIN: PH-SIM PUK (= response to
read command AT+CPIN?), i.e. it is now waiting for the Master Phone Code. This is
an 8-digit device code associated to the IMEI number of the mobile which can only by
obtained from the manufacturer or provider. When needed, contact Siemens AG and
request the Master Phone Code of the specific module.
There are three ways to enter the Master Phone code:
§ You can send the it with ATD followed by *#0003*<number># .
§ You can enter the Master Phone Code when prompted after input of
AT+CPIN. For instructions see the examples provided in Chapter 4.21.2).
§ As an alternative, you can use the AT+CPWD command and specify a new
password for <fac>="PS". To do so, enter the Master Phone Code for
<oldpwd> followed by <newpwd>, where <newpwd> may be the former dis-
abled "PS" password or a new one (see examples in Chapters 4.21.2 and
4.38).
Usually, the Master Phone Code will be supplied by mail or e-mail. If the received
number is enclosed in the *# codes typically used for the ATD option, it is important to
crop the preceding *#0003* characters and the appended #.
Example: You may be given the string *#0003*12345678#. When prompted
for the PH-SIM PUK simply enter 12345678.
If incorrectly input, the Master Phone Code is governed by a specific timing algorithm:
(n-1)*256 seconds (see table below). The timing should be considered by system in-
tegrators when designing an individual MMI.
Table 10: Timing algorithm of incorrect password input
Number of failed attempts Time to wait before next input is allowed
1st failed attempt No time to wait
2nd failed attempt 4 seconds
3rd failed attempt 3 * 256 seconds
4th failed attempt 4 * 256 seconds
5th failed attempt 5 * 256 seconds
6th failed attempt and so forth 6 * 256 seconds and so forth
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 115 of 256 15.07.2002
SIM locks: These are factory set locks, such as "PF", "PN", "PU", "PP", "PC". An 8-digit unlocking
code is required to operate the mobile with a different SIM card, or to lift the lock. The
code can only be obtained from the provider.
Failure to enter the password is subject to the same timing algorithm as the Master
Phone Code (see Table 10).
Call barring: Supported modes are "AO", "OI", "OX", "AI", "IR", "AB", "AG", "AC". If the call barring
password is entered incorrectly three times, the client will need to contact the service
provider to obtain a new one.
Summary of related chapters: Related +CME errors are listed in Chapter 9.1.1. For further instruc-
tions and examples see Chapters 4.21 (AT+CLCK Facility lock), 8.13
(AT^SLCK Facility lock, 4.38 (AT+CPWD Change password) and
8.36 (AT^SPWD Change password for a lock. A complete list of **#
codes is provided in Chapter 9.4.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 116 of 256 15.07.2002
4.36 AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2
Test command
AT+CPIN2=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CPIN2?
Response
TA returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether some password is required
or not.
+CPIN2: <code> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<code> READY ME is not pending for any password
SIM PIN2 ME is waiting for SIM PIN2.
This <code> is returned only when PIN2 authenti-
cation has not yet been done or has failed (+CME
ERROR:17).
SIM PUK2 ME is waiting for SIM PUK2.
This <code> is returned only when PIN2 authenti-
cation has failed and ME is pending for SIM PUK2
(i.e. +CME ERROR:18).
Write command
AT+CPIN2=
<pin>[,<new
pin>]
Response
The write command lets the ME store the entered password. This may be for ex-
ample the SIM PIN2 to benefit from the features listed below, or the SIM PUK2 to
replace a disabled PIN2 with a new one. Note that PIN2 can only be entered if
PIN1 authentication was done.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If the ME is requesting SIM PUK2, use <pin> to enter the PUK2, followed by
<newpin> to specify your new PIN2.
Parameter
<pin> password (string type), usually SIM PIN2 or, if requested, SIM PUK2
<new pin> if the requested code was SIM PUK2: new password (PIN2.
See Chapter 4.35.1 for more information about when you may need
to enter the PUK.
Reference Note
Functions accessible only after PIN2 authentication:
· AT+CACM: Accumulated call meter (ACM) reset or query
· AT+CAMM: Accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax) set or query
· AT+CLCK: Facility lock to "FD" (Fixed dialling phonebook)
· AT^SLCK: Facility lock to "FD" (Fixed dialling phonebook)
· AT+CPWD: Change "P2"password
· AT^SPWD: Change "P2"password
· AT+CPUC: Price per unit and currency table
· AT+CPIN2: Enter SIM PIN2 or SIM PUK2 if requested.
For example, SIM PIN2 will be needed when you attempt to edit the "FD"
phonebook and ME returns +CME Error 17 or +CPIN: SIM PIN2.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 117 of 256 15.07.2002
Once the required <pin> has been entered correctly, PIN2 authentication code
changes to READY. After 300s, a repetition of the authentication process is re-
quired (PIN2 authentication code changes from READY to SIM PIN2).
Example 1
To change PIN2:
AT+CPWD=P2,0000,8888 (where 0000 = old PIN2 and 8888 = new PIN2)
Example 2 To write to "FD" phonebook:
AT+CPBS="FD"
OK
AT+CPBW=2,"+493012345678",145,"Charly"
+CME Error 17 (access denied due to missing PIN2 authentication)
AT+CPIN2=8888
OK
AT+CPBW=2,"+493012345678",145,"Charly"
OK
Example 3 To change price per unit:
AT+CPUC="dm","5",8888
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 118 of 256 15.07.2002
4.37 AT+CPUC Price per unit and currency table
Test command
AT+CPUC=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CPUC?
Response
Read command returns the current parameters of PUC.
+CPUC: <currency>, <ppu> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CPUC=<curre
ncy>,<ppu>[,
<passwd>]
Response
Write command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit
and currency table. SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the parameters.
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<currency> string type; three-character currency code (e.g. “GBP”, “DEM”);
character set as specified with AT+CSCS. If the currency name
is longer than three characters, all characters will be cut off after
the third position. Before they are written to the SIM Card, these
characters are converted to the standard GSM alphabet.
<ppu> string type; price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator
(e.g. “2.66”). The length is limited to 20 characters. If the string
length is exceeded, the command is terminated with an error.
This string may only contain digits and a dot. Leading zeros are
removed from the string. The minimum and maximum value are
determined by the structure of the SIM-PUCT file. The maximum
price per unit value is 999 999 999.00. When successfully en-
tered, this value is rounded to maximum accuracy.
Note: Due to storage in mantisse (range 0-4095) and exponent (-7
to 7) it is possible that rounding errors occur.
<passwd> string type; SIM PIN2. String parameter which can contain any
combination of characters. The maximum string length is limited
to 8 characters. If this value is exceeded, the command termi-
nates with an error message. If the PIN2 is incorrect, a CME er-
ror (+CME ERROR: incorrect password) is output.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 119 of 256 15.07.2002
4.38 AT+CPWD Change password
Use this command when you want to
· change PIN1 or PIN2
· change the password supplied from your provider for call barring
· set individual phone security passwords
See Chapters 4.21 and 8.13 for more information on the various lock features. The AT^SPWD
command is a Siemens defined command equivalent to AT+CPWD. See Chapter 8.36.
Test command
AT+CPWD=?
Response
TA returns a list of pairs which represent the available facilities and the maxi-
mum length of the associated password.
+CPWD: (list of supported (<fac>, <pwdlength>)s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> see execute command
<pwdlength> integer max. length of password
Execute command
AT+CPWD =
<fac>, [<oldpwd>],
<newpwd>
Response
TA sets a new password for the facility lock function.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks set by manufacturer or client:
"SC" SIM (lock SIM card). SIM asks SIM PIN1 when ME is switched
on and when this lock command is issued.
"P2" SIM PIN2. Used to access the functions listed in Chapter 4.36.
"PS" Phone locked to SIM (device code). The "PS" password may ei-
ther be individually specified by the client or, depending on the
subscription, supplied from the provider (e.g. with a prepaid mo-
bile).
Note: Each, SIM PIN1 and SIM PIN2 are assigned a PUK to unblock a
disabled PIN.
The "PS" password, however, is never associated with a PUK. If
it is incorrectly entered three times, the Master Phone Code is
required. See Chapter 4.35.1
Locks set by the manufacturer:
"PF" lock Phone to the very first SIM card
"PN" Network Personalisation
"PU" Network-subset Personalisation
"PP" Service-Provider Personalisation
"PC" Corporate Personalisation
Note: Typical examples of factory set locks are prepaid phones or net-
work locks (e.g. if the operation of a mobile is restricted to a spe-
cific provider or operator). The locks can only be set by the
manufacturer and need to be a
reed u
on between the
arties
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 120 of 256 15.07.2002
concerned, e.g. provider, operator, distributor etc. on the one
side and the manufacturer on the other side. For details contact
your local dealer or Siemens AG.
The client should be aware that each of these lock types can
only be unlocked if the associated password is available. See
Chapter 4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Supplementary Service: Call barring
"AO" BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" BOIC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls)
"OX" BOIC-exHC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
"AI" BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
"IR" BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
"AB" All Barring services (applicable only for <mode> = 0)
"AG" All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode> = 0)
"AC" All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode> = 0)
Note: The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the
network. To benefit from call barring the client will need to sub-
scribe them, though a limited number of call barring types may
be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected
by a password supplied from the provider or operator. Usually
there is one password which applies to all call barring options.
For details contact your provider.
<oldpwd> password specified for the facility.
Can be ignored if no old password was allocated to the facility.
Take into account that a password may have already been set
by factory, or that the service is subject to a password issued by
the provider. See notes above or contact provider.
if <fac> = “SC” then PIN
if <fac> = “AO”...”AC” (barring) then network password
(if needed)
if <fac> = “P2” then PIN2
if <fac> = “PS” then password
<newpwd> new password
To delete a password use the following syntax:
at+cpwd=<fac>,<oldpwd>
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
CAUTION: After three attempts to enter a false PIN you will be prompted to en-
ter the PUK. Failure to enter the PUK will permanently diasble the SIM card.
See Chapter 4.35.1 for more information.
Example 1 To change PIN2:
AT+CPWD=P2,0000,8888 (where 0000 = old PIN2 and 8888 = new PIN2)
Example 2 To set password used to enable or disable barring of all outgoing calls:
AT+CPWD=ao,0000,3333
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 121 of 256 15.07.2002
Example 3 To change the "PS" lock password, using the correct old password:
AT+CPWD=PS,1111,2222 (where 1111 = old "PS" password and 2222 =
new password)
To specify a new "PS" lock password, after the old password was disabled, e.g.
after three failed attempts to enter the password (only if Master Phone Code is
availbale):
AT+CPWD=PS,12345678,1111 (where 12345678 is the Master Phone code
and 1111 is the new password. You may also
use <newpwd> to restore the former disabled
password). This operation deactivates the
present phone lock and sets a new one. See
also Chapter 4.35.1.
Alternatively, whithout giving a new password:
AT+CPWD=PS,12345678 Deactivates the present phone lock.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 122 of 256 15.07.2002
4.39 AT+CR Service reporting control
Test command
AT+CR=?
Response
+CR: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CR?
Response
+CR: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CR=<mode>
Response
Configures the TA whether or not to transmit an intermediate result code +CR:
<serv> to TE when a call is being set up.
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 disable
1 enable
Intermediate result code
If enabled, an intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during con-
nect negotiation when the TA has determined the speed and quality of service
to be used, before any error control or data compression reports are transmit-
ted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) appears.
+CR:<serv>
Parameter
<serv> REL ASYNC asynchronous non-transparent
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
The PLMN influences the second air interface (to the terminator), therefore an-
other mode may be established from the network
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 123 of 256 15.07.2002
4.40 AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for incoming call indication
Test command
AT+CRC=?
Response
+CRC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CRC?
Response
+CRC: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CRC=
[<mode>]
Response
Specifies whether or not to use the extended format of incoming call indication.
OK
Parameters
<mode> 0 disable extended format
1 enable extended format
Unsolicited result code
If enabled, the unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> replaces the normal
RING code to indicate the incoming call and the type of the call.
Parameter
<type> REL ASYNC asynchronous non-transparent
FAX facsimile
VOICE voice
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 124 of 256 15.07.2002
4.41 AT+CREG Network registration
Test command
AT+CREG=?
Response
+CREG: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CREG?
ME returns the URC presentation mode <n> and an integer <stat> that shows
the registration status of the ME. The location information elements <lac> and
<ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered to the network.
Response
+CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK
or if an error occurs which is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err> (for error text see Chapter 9.1.1. or set AT+CMEE=2)
Write command
AT+CREG=
[<n>]
Use the write command to select the type of URC. Two types of URCs are
available:
+CREG: <stat> if <n>=1. To be issued when the ME's network registration
status changes
or
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] if <n>=2. To be issued when ME's network registra-
tion or network cell changes.
Response
OK
or if an error occurs which is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
<err> 256 If <n> = 0: Attempt to set once again <n>=0 causes error
code 256.
If <n> > 0: Attempt to activate a URC mode that is already
active is acknowledged with OK.
Parameter
<n > 0 disable URCs
1 enable URC +CREG:<stat> to report status of network reg-
istration
2 enable URC +CREG:<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] to report status of
network registration including location information. Please
note that optional parameters will not be displayed during
call.
<stat> 0 not registered, ME is currently not searching for new opera-
tor
1 registered, home network
2 not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new op-
erator
3 registration denied
4 unknown
5 registered, roaming
<lac> string type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
(e.g. "00C3" equals 193 in decimal)
<ci> string type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 125 of 256 15.07.2002
Unsolicited result code
If <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status:
+CREG: <stat>
If <n>=2 and there is a change in the ME network registration status or a
change of the network cell:
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
Optional parameters will not be displayed during a call.
Example AT+CREG=2 Activates extended URC mode.
OK
AT+COPS=0 Forces ME to automatically search network
OK operator.
+CREG: 2 URC reports that ME is currently searching.
+CREG: 1,"0145","291A" URC reports that operator has been found.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 126 of 256 15.07.2002
4.42 AT+CRLP Select radio link protocol param. for orig. non-transparent
data call
Test command
AT+CRLP=?
Response
TA returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of supported
<T1>s), (list of supported <N2>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CRLP?
Response
TA returns current settings for the supported RLP version 0.
+CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<verx>]
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CRLP= [<iws>
[,<mws> [,<T1>
[,<N2 >]]]]
Response
TA sets radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data
calls are originated.
OK
Parameter
<iws> 0-61 Interworking window size (IWF to MS)
<mws> 0-61 Mobile window size (MS to IWF)
<T1> 48-78-255 Acknowledgement timer (T1 in 10 ms units)
<N2> 1-6-255 Re-transmission attempts N2
<verx> 0 RLP version number in integer format; when version
indication is not present it shall equal 0.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· RLP version 0: single-link basic version;
· RLP version 1: single-link extended version (e.g. extended by data com-
pression);
· RLP version 2: multi-link version.
· Compression and multi-link are not supported.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 127 of 256 15.07.2002
4.43 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access
Test command
AT+CRSM=?
Response
OK
Write command
AT+CRSM=<com
mand>[,<fileId>
[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>
[,<data>]]]
By using this command the TE has access to the SIM database. SIM access is
restricted to the commands which are listed below.
As response to the command the ME sends the current SIM information pa-
rameters and response data. ME error result code +CME ERROR may be re-
turned when the command cannot be passed to the SIM, but failure in the exe-
cution of the command in the SIM is reported in <sw1> and <sw2> parameters.
Response
+CRSM: <sw1>, <sw2> [,<response>]
OK / ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<command> 176 READ BINARY
178 READ RECORD
192 GET RESPONSE
214 UPDATE BINARY
220 UPDATE RECORD
242 STATUS
all other values are reserved; refer GSM 11.11.
<fileId> integer type; this is the identifier for an elementary
data file on SIM. Mandatory for every command ex-
cept STATUS
<P1>,<P2>,<P3> integer type, range 0 - 255
parameters to be passed on by the ME to the SIM; re-
fer GSM 11.11.
<data> information which shall be written to the SIM (hexa-
decimal character format)
<sw1>, <sw2> integer type, range 0 - 255
status information from the SIM about the execution
of the actual command. These parameters are deliv-
ered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed
execution of the command; refer GSM 11.11.
<response> response of a successful completion of the command
previously issued (hexadecimal character format)
Reference
GSM 07.07
GSM 11.11
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 128 of 256 15.07.2002
4.44 AT+CSCS Set TE character set
Test command
AT+CSCS=?
Response
+CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)
OK
Read command
AT+CSCS?
Response
+CSCS: <chset>
OK
Write command
AT+CSCS=[<chset>]
Response
Write command informs TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE.
TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME
character sets.
OK
Parameters
<chset>:
"GSM" GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1);
Note: This setting may cause software flow control problems since
the codes used to stop and resume data flow (XOFF = decimal 19,
(XON = decimal 17) are interpreted as normal characters.
"UCS2" 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set (ISO/IEC10646
[32]); UCS2 character strings are converted to hexadecimal num-
bers from 0000 to FFFF; e.g. "004100620063" equals three 16-bit
characters with decimal values 65, 98 and 99, $(AT R97)$
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· Also see chapter 1.5 (“Supported character sets”).
· When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and used TE alphabet is
7-bit, the highest bit will be set to zero.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 129 of 256 15.07.2002
4.45 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme
The AT+CSNS command enables the ME to accept incoming calls when no bearer capability infor-
mation is provided with the call, e.g. single numbering scheme calls or calls originitating from analog
devices.
The command must be set before the call comes. By default, when you do not modify the settings,
all calls received without bearer element are assumed to be voice.
Please note that you can use the command if PIN authentication has been done during current ses-
sion. The setting will be automatically saved when you power down the GSM engine with AT^SMSO.
Test command
AT+CSNS=?
Response
+CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read command
AT+CSNS?
Response
+CSNS: <mode>
OK
Write command
AT+CSNS=[<mode>]
Response
Write command
OK
Parameters
<mode>:
0 Voice Each call received without bearer element is as-
sumed to be speech.
2 Fax Each call received without bearer element is as-
sumed to be an incoming fax.
4 Data Each call received without bearer element is as-
sumed to be a data call.
Please take into account that the bearer service
parameters set with AT+CBST apply to all data
calls including those received without bearer ca-
pability. To avoid conflicts see Chapter 4.5.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 130 of 256 15.07.2002
4.46 AT+CSQ Signal quality
Test command
AT+CSQ=?
Response
+CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s), (list of supported <ber>) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT+CSQ
Response
TA returns received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate
<ber> from the ME.
+CSQ: <rssi>, <ber> OK
Parameter
<rssi> Receive level:
0 -113 dBm or less
1 -111 dBm
2...30 -109... -53 dBm
31 -51 dBm or greater
99 not known or not detectable
<ber> Bit error rate:
0...7 as RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08
section 8.2.4.
99 not known or not detectable.
To check the bit error rate there must be a call in progress to
obtain realistic values. If no call is set up, there is no BER to be
determined. In this case the indicated value may be 0 or 99,
depending on the SIM card.
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 131 of 256 15.07.2002
4.47 AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications
Test command
AT+CSSN=?
Response
+CSSN: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <m>s)OK
Parameter
<n> 0 Suppresses the +CSSI messages
1 Activates the +CSSI messages
<m> 0 Suppresses the +CSSU messages
1 Activates the +CSSU messages
Read command
AT+CSSN?
Response
+CSSN: <n>,<m>OK
Parameter
<n> See Test command
<m> See Test command
Write command
AT+CSSN=<n>[,<m>]
Response
OK
Parameter
<n> See read command
<m> See read command
Unexpected message
+CSSI: <code1> When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is
received after a mobile originated call setup, intermediate
result code +CSSI: <code1> is sent to TE before any
other MO call setup result codes
+CSSU: <code2> When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is
received during a mobile terminated call setup or during
a call, unsolicited result code +CSSU: code2>is sent to
TE.
Parameter
<code1> Intermediate result code
3 Waiting call is pending
<code2> Unsolicited result code
0 The incoming call is a forwarded call.
5 Held call was terminated
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 132 of 256 15.07.2002
4.48 AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data
Test command
AT+CUSD=?
Response
+CUSD: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+ CUSD?
Response
TA returns the current <n> value.
+CUSD: <n> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write command
AT+ CUSD=
<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]
This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary Service
Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and mobile initiated op-
erations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presen-
tation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network, or net-
work initiated operation) +CUSD:<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE.
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD
string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response
USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD
result code.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM
supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.
Parameter
<n> 0 disable the result code presentation in the TA
1 enable the result code presentation in the TA
2 cancel session (not applicable to read command re-
sponse)
<str> string type USSD-string (when <str> parameter is not given, net-
work is not interrogated).
If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set ac-
cording to rules of GSM 07.05 Annex A.
<dcs> GSM 03.38 Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer for-
mat (default 15)
<m> 0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-
Notify, or no further information needed after mobile initi-
ated operation)
1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-
Request, or further information needed after mobile initi-
ated operation)
2 USSD terminated by network
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· For the write command <dcs>=15 is supported only.
· On an unsolicited result code with parameter <m>=1 a '> ' is given for fur-
ther user action. The user action is finished with a <ctrl-Z> or aborted with
<ESC>.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 133 of 256 15.07.2002
4.49 AT+VTD=<n> Tone duration
Test command
AT+VTD=?
This command refers to an integer <duration> that defines the length
of tones transmitted with the +VTS command.
Response
+VTD (list of supported <duration>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+VTD?
Response
<duration> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+VTD=
<duration>
Response
OK
Parameter
<duration> 1 – 255 duration of the tone in 1/10 second
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
4.50 AT+VTS DTMF and tone generation (<Tone> in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D})
Test command
AT+VTS=?
Response
+VTS: (list of supported <dtmf>s)[, (list of supported <duration>s)] OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
1.
AT+VTS=<dtmf-string>
2.
AT+VTS=<dtmf>,<duration>
Response
The Write command is intended for sending ASCII characters or
strings which cause the MSC (Mobile Switching Center) to transmit
DTMF tones to a remote subscriber. The Write can only be used dur-
ing an active voice call.
1. Allows the user to send a sequence of DTMF tones with a duration
that was defined with the AT+VTD command.
2. Allows the user to send a single DTMF tone. In this case, the dura-
tion can be indvidually determined during the call.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<dtmfstring> String of ASCII characters in the set 0-9,#,*,A, B, C, D.
Maximal length of the string is 29. The string must be
enclosed in quotation marks (””).
<dtmf> ASCII character in the set 0-9,#,*, A, B, C, D.
<duration> 1-255 duration of a tone in 1/10 second
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
The AT+VTS command is usable before PIN1 authentication has
been done.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 134 of 256 15.07.2002
4.51 AT+WS46 Select wireless network
Test command
AT+WS46=?
Response
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read command
AT+WS46?
Response
<n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<n> 12 GSM digital cellular
Write command
AT+WS46=[<n>]
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 135 of 256 15.07.2002
5 AT commands originating from GSM 07.05 for SMS
The SMS related AT Commands are according to the GSM 07.05 specification issued by ETSI (Euro-
pean Telecommunications Standards Institute).
5.1 AT+CMGC Send an SMS command
Test command
AT+CMGC=?
Response
OK
Write command
if text mode (AT+CMGF=1):
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]<CR>
text is entered <ctrl-Z/ESC>
Response
if text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending successful:
+CMGC: <mr>[,<scts>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Write command
if PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGC=?
Response
if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
+CMGC: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<length> Length of PDU
<pdu> See ”AT+CMGL”
<mr> Message reference
<fo> depending on the command or result code: first octet of
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17),
SMS- STATUS-REPORT, or SMS -COMMAND (default 2)
in integer format
<ct> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<pid> GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default
0)
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<da> GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted into characters; type of address
given by <toda>
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer to <dt> )
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" before entering text or PDU.
· At baudrates below 19200 it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to +ATS3, default <CR>, pg. 32)
before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination charac-
ter followed by the response formating character (refer to +ATS4,
default <LF>, pg. 32) can cause problems.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 136 of 256 15.07.2002
5.2 AT+CMGD Delete SMS message
Test command
AT+CMGD=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Execute command
AT+CMGD=
<index>
Response
TA deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location <in-
dex>.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR <err>
Parameter
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by
the associated memory
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
If there is no SMS stored at the selected index, the response is OK too.
5.3 AT+CMGF Select SMS message format
Test command
AT+CMGF=?
Response
+CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CMGF?
Response
+CMGF: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CMGF =
[<mode>]
Response
TA sets parameter which specifies the input and output format of messages to
be used.
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 PDU mode
1 text mode
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 137 of 256 15.07.2002
5.4 AT+CMGL List SMS messages from preferred store
Test command
AT+CMGL=?
Response
+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT+CMGL[=
<stat>]
Parameter
1) If text mode:
<stat> “REC UNREAD” Received unread messages (default)
“REC READ” Received read messages
“STO UNSENT” Stored unsent messages
“STO SENT” Stored sent messages
“ALL” All messages
2) If PDU mode:
<stat> 0 Received unread messages (default)
1 Received read messages
2 Stored unsent messages
3 Stored sent messages
4 All messages
Response
TA returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage <mem1>
to the TE. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage
changes to ‘received read’.
Note: If the selected <mem1> can contain different types of SMs (e.g. SMS-
DELIVERs, SMS- SUBMITs, SMS- STATUS-REPORTs and SMS-
COMMANDs), the response may be a mix of the responses of different SM
types. TE application can recognize the response format by examining the
third response parameter.
Response
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command successful:
for SMS- SUBMITs and/or SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]] OK
for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[...]] OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 138 of 256 15.07.2002
for SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[...]] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
[<CR><LF>+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[alpha],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
[...]] OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<alpha> string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corre-
sponding to the entry found in phonebook; implementation of this
feature is manufacturer- specific
<ct> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<da> GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <toda>
<data>
In case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format:
- if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indi-
cates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set ac-
cording to rules of Annex A
- if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set:
ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into hexadecimal numbers con-
taining two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
Parameter
<dt> GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format: “yy/MM/
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year (two last digits),
month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone. For example,
6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours equals
“94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
<fo> depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), SMS- STATUS-
REPORT, or SMS -COMMAND (default 2) in integer format
<length> integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length
of the message body <data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU
mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets
(i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the
length)
<index> inte
g
er t
yp
e; value in the ran
g
e of location numbers su
pp
orted b
y
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 139 of 256 15.07.2002
the associated memory
<mr> GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<oa> GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <tooa>
<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data
unit into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g.
octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A
(IRA 50 and 65)). In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexa-
decimal format.
<ra> GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <tora>
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP- Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format
(refer <dt>)
<st> GSM 03.40 TP-Status in integer format
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in inte-
ger format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default is 145,
otherwise default is 129)
<tooa> GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in inte-
ger format (default refer<toda>)
<tora> GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (default refer<toda>)
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if AT^SSCONF=1 has
been set before. See Chapter 8.38 for details on AT^SSCONF.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 140 of 256 15.07.2002
5.5 AT+CMGR Read SMS message
Test command
AT+CMGR=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT+CMGR=
<index>
Parameter
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
Response
TA returns SMS message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the
storage changes to ‘received read’.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command successful:
for SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>] [,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-STATUS-REPORT:
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
for SMS- COMMAND:
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<ct> [,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],[<toda>],<length>
<CR><LF><cdata>]
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> OK
3)If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<alpha> string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corresponding
to the entry found in phonebook; implementation of this feature is manu-
facturer specific
<stat> integer type in PDU mode (default 0), or string type in text mode (default
“REC UNREAD”); indicates the status of message in memory: defined
values:
0 “REC UNREAD” received unread message (i.e. new message)
1 “REC READ” received read message
2 “STO UNSENT” stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 “STO SENT” stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 141 of 256 15.07.2002
<ct> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<da> GSM 03.40 TP- Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into cha-
racters; type of address given by <toda>
<data>
In case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format:
-if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indi-
cates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set ac-
cording to rules covered in Annex A
-if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set:
ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into hexadecimal numbers contain-
ing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented
to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)
<dcs> depending on the command or result code: GSM 03.38 SMS Data Cod-
ing Scheme (default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in inte-
ger format
<cdata> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Data in text mode responses; ME/TA con-
verts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers
(e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A
(IRA 50 and 65))
<dt> GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format: ”yy/MM/
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year (two last digits),
month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone. For example, 6th of
May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours equals ”94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
<fo> depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS- DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), SMS-STATUS-REPORT,
or SMS-COMMAND (default 2) in integer format
<length> integer type value indicating in text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the
message body <data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode
(+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP
layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the used cod-
ing scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding scheme is used,
and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM coding scheme.
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<mr> GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<oa> GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string for-
mat; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted
into characters; type of address given by <tooa>
<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit
into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with
integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and
65)). In the case of CBS: <ra> GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Ad-
dress-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alpha-
bet characters) are converted into characters; type of address given by
<tora>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 142 of 256 15.07.2002
<pid> GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default 0)
<ra> GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Address-Value field in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to
characters of the currently selected TE character set (refer command
AT+CSCS Select TE character set.); type of address given by <tora>
<sca> GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD
numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to charac-
ters of the currently selected TE character set (refer command
AT+CSCS Select TE character set); type of address given by <tosca>
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer
<dt>)
<st> GSM 03.40 TP-Status in integer format
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default is 145, other-
wise default is 129)
<tooa> GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (default refer<toda>)
<tora> GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer for-
mat (default refer<toda>)
<tosca> GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (de-
fault refer <toda>)
<vp> depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period
either in integer format (default 167) or in time-string format (refer <dt>)
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
· Response to a CMGR to an empty record index: +CMGR: 0,,0
· Response to a CMGR to a not existing record index: +CMS ERROR: invalid
memory index
· The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if AT^SSCONF=1 has
been set before. See Chapter 8.38 for details on AT^SSCONF.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 143 of 256 15.07.2002
5.6 AT+CMGS Send SMS message
Test command
AT+CMGS=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Execute command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
2) If PDU mode
(+CMGF=0):
+CMGS=<length><CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
ESC aborts message
Response
TA transmits SMS message from TE to network (SMS-SUBMIT).
Message reference value <mr> is returned to TE on successful mes-
sage delivery. Value can be used to identify message upon unsolic-
ited delivery status report result code.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending successful:
+CMGS: <mr>[,scts>] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
+CMGS: <mr>[,ackpdu>] OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<da> GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet char-
acters) are converted into characters; type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<length> integer type value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the
length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer
SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
<mr> GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<dt> GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format:
“yy/MM/ dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year
(two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and
time zone. For example, 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2
hours equals “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
<ackpdu> GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format
is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM
04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be enclosed in
double quote characters like a normal string type parameter
<pdu> For SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of
TP data unit into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA
characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to
TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)). In the case of
CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 144 of 256 15.07.2002
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" and then start to send text to the module.
· To send the message simply enter <CTRL-Z>. See Execute com-
mand for possible responses.
· Sending can be aborted by entering <ESC>. Of course, the mes-
sage will not be sent, though the operation is acknowledged with
OK.
· When sending e-mails via SMS check that, depending on the pro-
vider, the @ symbol will be recognized and correctly interpreted. If
not, make sure what character to use instead. A widely used alter-
native is typing “*”.
· At baudrates lower than 19200 it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to +ATS3, default <CR>, pg. 32)
before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination character
followed by the response formating character (see +ATS4, default
<LF>, pg. 32) can cause problems.
· All characters entered behind the “>” prompt will be recognized as
GSM characters. For example, “Backspace” (ASCII character 8)
does not delete a character, but will be inserted into the SMS as
an additional physical character. As a result, the character you
wanted to delete still appears in the text, plus the GSM code
equivalent of the Backspace key. See also Chapter 9.5 which pro-
vides the supported alphabet tables.
· In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the
used coding scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding
scheme is used, and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM
coding scheme.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 145 of 256 15.07.2002
5.7 AT+CMGW Write SMS message to memory
Test command
AT+CMGW=?
Response
OK
Execute command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
+CMGW[=<oa/da>
[,tooa/toda>[,stat>]]]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
<ESC> quits without send-
ing
2) If PDU mode
(+CMGF=0):
+CMGW=<length>
[,stat]<CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
Response
TA transmits SMS (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) from TE
to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored
message is returned. Message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’
unless otherwise given in parameter <stat>.
Note: SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be
stored in text mode.
If writing is successful:
+CMGW: <index> OK
If writing fails, for example, if a message is too long, the result code
depends on the current setting of the AT^SM20 command (see Chap-
ter 8.18): If the AT^SM20 parameter <m> equals 1 (factory default)
then failure to write a message is followed by:
OK
Users should be aware that, in this case, the message will not be writ-
ten to the selected SMS storage.
If the AT^SM20 parameter <m> equals 0, then failure to write a mes-
sage is followed by:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
For example, if a message was too long <err> code 305 (“Invalid text
mode parameter”) is returned.
Parameter
<oa> GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet char-
acters) are converted into characters; type of address given
by <tooa>
<da> GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet char-
acters) are converted into characters; type of address given
by <toda>
<tooa> GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<length> integer type value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the
length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer
SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
<stat> integer type in PDU mode (default 0), or string type in text
mode (defauld “REC UNREAD“); indicates the status of
message in memory; defined values:
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 146 of 256 15.07.2002
0 “REC UNREAD” Received unread messages (default)
1 “REC READ” Received read messages
2 “STO UNSENT” Stored unsent messages
3 “STO SENT” Stored sent messages
<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into hexadecimal numbers con-
taining two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42
is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)).
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal for-
mat.
<index> Index of message in selected storage <mem2>
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" and then start to send text to the module.
· To store the message simply enter <CTRL-Z>. See Execute com-
mand for possible responses.
· Writing can be aborted by entering <ESC>. Of course, the mes-
sage will not be stored, though the operation is acknowledged with
OK.
· When sending e-mails via SMS the @ character may be replaced
with “*” as defined in GSM 03.40 (3GPP TS 23.040).
· At baudrates lower than 19200 it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to +ATS3, default <CR>, pg. 32)
before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination character
followed by the response formating character (refer to +ATS4, de-
fault <LF>, pg. 32) can cause problems.
· All characters entered behind the “>” prompt will be recognized as
GSM characters. For example, “Backspace” (ASCII character 8)
does not delete a character, but will be inserted into the SMS as
an additional physical character. As a result, the character you
wanted to delete still appears in the text, plus the GSM code
equivalent of the Backspace key. See Chapter 9.5 which provides
the supported alphabet tables. Also refer to Chapter 1.5 for gen-
eral remarks on character sets.
· In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the
used coding scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding
scheme is used, and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM
coding scheme.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 147 of 256 15.07.2002
5.8 AT+CMSS Send SMS message from storage
Test command
AT+CMSS=?
Response
OK
Parameter
Execute command
+CMSS=
<index>[,<da>
[,<toda>]]
Response
TA sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND). If new recipi-
ent address <da> is given for SMS-SUBMIT, it shall be used instead of the
one stored with the message. Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE
on successful message delivery. Values can be used to identify message
upon unsolicited delivery status report result code.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and send successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,scts>] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and send successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,ackpdu>] OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<ackpdu> GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU;
format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without
GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be
bounded by double quote characters like a normal string
type parameter.
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers sup-
ported by the associated memory
<da> GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field
in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted into characters; type of ad-
dress given by <toda>
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-
string format.
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address oc-
tet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +
(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<mr> GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 148 of 256 15.07.2002
5.9 AT+CNMA New SMS message acknowledge to ME/TE, only phase 2+
Test command
AT+CNMA=?
Response
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
+CNMA: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameters
See execute command
Execute command
1) If text mode:
AT+CNMA
2) If PDU mode:
AT+CNMA[=<n>]
Response
TA confirms successful receipt of a new message (SMS-DELIVER or SMS-
STATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the TE. TA shall not send an-
other +CMT or +CDS result code to TE until previous one is acknowledged.
If ME does not receive acknowledgment within required time (network time-
out), ME sends RP-ERROR to the network. TA shall automatically disable
routing to TE by setting both <mt> and <ds> values of +CNMI to zero.
Note: The command shall o n l y be used when +CSMS parameter <ser-
vice> equals 1 (= phase 2+).
1) If text mode:
OK
2) If PDU mode:
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<n> 0 command operates similarly as defined for the text mode
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
If multiplex mode is activated (+CMUX=0) the +CNMI parameter will be set to
zero on all channels, if one channel fails to acknowledge an incoming mes-
sage within the required time.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 149 of 256 15.07.2002
5.10 AT+CNMI New SMS message indications
Test command
AT+CNMI=?
Response
+CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <mt>s), (list of supported
<bm>s), (list of supported <ds>s), (list of supported <bfr>s) OK
Parameter
See set command
Read command
AT+CNMI?
Response
+CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr> OK
Parameter
See set command
Write command
AT+CNMI =
[<mode>]
[,<mt>][,<bm>]
[,<ds>][,<bfr>]
Response
TA selects the procedure how the receipt of new SMS messages from the network
is indicated to the TE when TE is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON. If TE is inactive
(e.g. DTR signal is OFF), the reception of messages shall be performed as speci-
fied in GSM 03.38.
Note1: If the DTR signal is not available or the state of the signal is ignored
(V.25ter command &D0), reliable message transfer can be assured by us-
ing +CNMA acknowledgment procedure.
Note2: The rules <mt>=2 and <mt>=3 for storing received SM are possible only if
phase 2+ compatibility is activated with +CSMS=1
Note3: The parameter <ds>=1 is only available in phase 2+
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<mode> 0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code
buffer is full, indications can be buffered in some other place or
the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the
new received indications.
1 Discard indication and reject new received message
unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in
on-line data mode). Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is re-
served (e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE af-
ter reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link
specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data
when TA is in on-line data mode.
<mt> Rules for storing received SMS depend on the relevant data coding
method (refer to GSM 03.38 [2]), preferred memory storage (+CPMS)
setting and this value
Note: If AT command interface is acting as the only display device, the
ME must support storage of class 0 messages and messages in the
message waiting indication group (discard message)
0 No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
1 If SMS-DELIVER is stored in ME/TA, indication of the memory
location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 150 of 256 15.07.2002
2 SMS-DELIVERs, except class 2 messages and messages in
the message waiting indication group (store message) are
routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMT: ,<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled)
+CMT: <oa>,, <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>, <sca>,
<tosca>, <length>] <CR> <LF> <data> (text mode enabled)
3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using
unsolicited result codes defined in <mt>=2. Messages of other
data coding schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1.
<bm> Rules for storing received CBMs depend on the relevant data coding
method (refer to GSM 03.38 [2]), the setting of Select CBM Types
(+CSCB) and this value:
0 No CBM indications are routed to the TE.
2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited re-
sult code: +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode en-
abled) or +CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR>
<LF><data> (text mode enabled).
3 Class 3 CBMs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result
codes defined in <bm>=2.
<ds> 0 No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE.
1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolic-
ited result code: +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode
enabled) or +CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>, <st>
(text mode enabled)
2 If SMS-STATUS-REPORT is routed into ME/TA, indication of
the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result
code: +CDSI: <mem>,<index>
<bfr> 1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this com-
mand is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered.
Unsolicited result
code Syntax of responses output when SMS is received:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index> Indicates that new message has been re-
ceived
+CBMI: <mem>,<index> Indicates that new CB message has been re-
ceived
+CMT: ,<length><CR><LF><pdu> Short message is output directly
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Cell broadcast message is output directly
During each SMS or Cell Broadcast Messages the Ring Line goes Logic “1“ for
one second.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 151 of 256 15.07.2002
Reference
GSM 07.05
General remarks:
· Parameters <mt>=2,3 and <ds>=1 are only available with GSM phase 2+ (see
+CSMS=1). Incoming SMs or Status Reports have to be acknowledged with
AT+CNMA=0 when using these phase 2+ parameters.
· The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if AT^SSCONF=1 has
been set before. See Chapter 8.38 for details on AT^SSCONF.
· To allow SMS overflow presentation during data transfers via Break, use
AT+CNMI=3,1 (see Chapter 8.15).
Handling of Class 0 short messages:
· If the host application is provided with a display and AT^SSDA=1 has been set
Class 0 short messages can be displayed immediately. Refer to Chapter 8.39
for details.
· If the host application does not include a display, ME handles Class 0 short
messages as though there was no message class, i.e. it will ignore bits 0 and 1
in the TP-DCS and normal rules for exceeded memory capacity shall apply.
This approach is compliant with GSM 03.38.
Requirements specific to Multiplex mode:
· In multiplex mode (AT+CMUX=0) only one channel can use a phase 2+ pa-
rameter. The parameter for <mt> and <ds> on the other channels have to be
set to zero.
· If either a SM or a Status Report is not acknowledged, all +CNMI parameters
will be set to zero on all channels.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 152 of 256 15.07.2002
5.11 AT+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage
Test command
AT+CPMS=?
Response
+CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s), (list of supported <mem2>s), (list of sup-
ported <mem3>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CPMS?
Response
+CPMS: <mem1>,<used1>,<total1>,<mem2>,<used2>,<total2>,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CPMS=
<mem1>
[,<mem2>
[,<mem3>]]
Response
TA selects memory storages <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for read-
ing, writing, etc.
+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR:<err>
Parameter
<mem1> Memory to be used when listing, reading and deleting messages:
“SM” SIM message storage
“ME” Mobile Equipment message storage
“MT” Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<mem2> Memory to be used when writing and sending messages:
“SM” SIM message storage
“ME” Mobile Equipment message storage
“MT” Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<mem3> Received messages will be placed to this storage if routing to TE is not
set. See AT+CNMI command with parameter <mt>=2 (Chapter 5.10).
“SM” SIM message storage
“MT” Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<usedx> Number of messages currently in <memx>
<totalx> Number of messages storable in <memx>
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
General remarks
· The Mobile Equipment storage "ME" offers space for 25 short messages.
· The storage "MT" is the sum of the storages "ME" and "SM". The indices (<in-
dex>) from 1 to 25 are associated to the "ME" storage. Indices equal to 26 and
higher are allocated to the "SM" storage.
· <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are saved in the non-volatile memory.
· The user should be aware that the setting “MT” involves “ME” and “SM”, with
“ME” being filled up first. If the "ME" storage is full, MC35 will proceed with the
"SM" storage.
Incomin
g
Class 1 short messa
g
es
(
ME s
p
ecific
)
will be
p
referabl
y
stored to
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 153 of 256 15.07.2002
“ME” and may be transferred to the “SM” storage if “ME” is used up.
Incoming Class 2 messages (SIM specific) will be stored to the SIM card only,
no matter whether or not there is free “ME” space.
As a result, the ^SMGO: 2 indication (see AT^SMGO in Chapter 8.15) may be
presented without prior indication of ^SMGO: 1. For more information regarding
SIM and ME specific message classes refer to <dcs> and the following specifi-
cations: GSM 03.38 and 3GPP TS 23.038.
Handling of <mem3> storage:
· Before switching <mem3> from “MT” to “SM” it is necessary to delete all short
messages out of the “ME” storage.
· When <mem3> is switched from “MT” to “SM” all free “ME” locations will be
filled with dummy short messages. This procedure can take up to 35 seconds,
until all the 25 records are written.
When <mem3> equals “SM”, do not delete the dummy messages in the “ME”
storage. They will be automatically deleted when you switch back from “SM” to
MT”. Again, this may take up to 35 seconds.
· In Multiplex mode, the parameter <mem3> will be the same on all instances,
but the settings of <mem1> and <mem2> may vary on each channel.
· To avoid inconsistencies, it is recommended to use the same parameter for all
<memx>.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 154 of 256 15.07.2002
5.12 AT+CSCA SMS service centre address
Test command
AT+CSCA=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CSCA?
Response
+CSCA: <sca>,<tosca> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CSCA=<sca>
[,<tosca>]
TA updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are
transmitted. In text mode, setting is used by send and write commands. In PDU
mode, setting is used by the same commands, but only when the length of the
SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero.
Note: This command writes the service centre address to non-volatile memory.
Response
OK
Parameter
<sca> GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address value field in string format; BCD
numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into
characters; type of address given by <tosca>
Maximum length of address: 20 characters
<tosca> Service centre address format GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-of-
Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
If no parameter is entered after AT+CSCA= the content of <sca> will be deleted.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 155 of 256 15.07.2002
5.13 AT+CSCB Select cell broadcast messages
Test command
AT+CSCB=?
Response
+CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CSCB?
Response
+CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CSCB=[<mode>
[,<mids>[,<dcss>]]]
Parameter
<mode> 0 Accepts messages that are defined in <mids> and <dcss>
1 Does not accept messages that are defined in <mids>
and <dcss>
<mids> String type; combinations of CBM message IDs (e.g.
"0,1,5,320-478,922"). The number of ranges in <mids> parame-
ter string is limited to 6
<dcss> String type; combinations of CBM data coding schemes (e.g.
"0-3,5")
Note:
If <mode>=1 is selected the parameter <mids> has to be given as only one
area (e.g. “0-99“)
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 156 of 256 15.07.2002
5.14 AT+CSDH Show SMS text mode parameters
Test command
AT+CSDH=?
Response
+CSDH: (list of supported <show>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CSDH?
Response
+CSDH:<show> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CSDH=
<show>
Response
TA sets whether or not detailed header information is shown in text mode result
codes.
OK
Parameter
<show> 0 do not show header values defined in commands +CSCA
and +CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>, <pid> and <dcs>)
nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in +CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR
result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and SMS-SUBMITs in text
mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR result code, do not
show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>, <length> or <cdata>
1 show the values in result codes
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 157 of 256 15.07.2002
5.15 AT+CSMP Set SMS text mode parameters
Test command
AT+CSMP=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT+CSMP?
Response
+CSMP:<fo>,<vp/scts>,<pid>,<dcs> OK
Parameter
See set command
Set command
AT+CSMP=
<fo>[,<vp/scts>[
,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]
Response
TA selects values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the net-
work or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is pos-
sible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC
(<vp> is in range 0... 255) or define the absolute time of the validity period termi-
nation (<vp> is a string). The format of <vp> is given by <fo>. If TA supports the
enhanced validity period format, see GSM 03.40), it shall be given as a hexadezi-
mal coded string (refer e.g. <pdu>) with quotes.
Note:
When storing a SMS_DELIVER from the TE to the preferred memory storage in
text mode (refer write command to Message Memory +CMGW), <vp> field can be
used for <scts>
Parameter
<fo> depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), or SMS-COMMAND (default
2) in integer format
<scts> GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer
<dt>)
<vp> depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period
either in integer format (default 167) ), in time-string format (refer <dt>),
or if is supported, in enhanced format (hexadecimal coded string with
quotes)
<pid> Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default 0), refer GSM 03.40
<dcs> SMS Data Coding Scheme (default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding
Scheme in integer format depending on the command or result code:
GSM 03.38
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
The command writes the parameters to the non-volatile memory.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 158 of 256 15.07.2002
5.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service
Test command
AT+CSMS=?
Response
+CSMS: (list of supported <service>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CSMS?
Response
+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CSMS=
<service>
Response
+CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<service> 0 GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+
features which do not require new command syntax may be
supported, e.g. correct routing of messages with new Phase 2+
data coding schemes)
1 GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2+ version; the requirement
of <service> setting 1 is mentioned under corresponding com-
mand descriptions).
<mt> Mobile Terminated Messages:
0 Type not supported
1 Type supported
<mo> Mobile Originated Messages:
0 Type not supported
1 Type supported
<bm> Broadcast Type Messages:
0 Type not supported
1 Type supported
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
If CSMS Mode is switched from Phase 2+ to Phase 2 and one or more CNMI Pa-
rameter are Phase 2+ specific a '+CMS ERROR: unknown error' will appear. It is
recommended to switch the CNMI Parameters to Phase 2 specific values before
entering Phase 2.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 159 of 256 15.07.2002
6 GPRS AT commands in accordance with GSM 07.07
This chapter provides GPRS specific AT commands. For information on using GPRS commands in
multiplex mode see chapter 4.28.
6.1 Commands specific to MTs supporting GPRS
This clause defines commands that a TE (Terminal Equipment, i.e. an application running on a
controlling PC) may use to control a GPRS MT (Mobile Termination, the Wireless Module). Refer ro
Chapter 6.4 for selected examples of using GPRS AT commands.
6.1.1 AT+CGATT GPRS attach and detach
Test command
AT+CGATT=?
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS
service states.
Response
+CGATT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<state> See write command
Read command
AT+CGATT?
The read command returns the current GPRS service state.
Response
+CGACT: <state>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<state> See write command
Write command
AT+CGATT=
[<state>]
The execution command enables the MT get attached to or detached from the
GPRS service. After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter
command state. If the MT is already in the requested state, the command is ig-
nored and the OK response is returned. Any active PDP contexts will be auto-
matically deactivated when the attachment state changes to detached.
If the MT is not able to attach for more than 5 minutes, the command returns an
error code, though the MT is still trying to attach.
Parameter
<state> indicates the state of GPRS attachment
0 – detached
1 – attached
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 160 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.2 AT+CGACT PDP context activate or deactivate
Test command
AT+CGACT=?
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported PDP
context activation states.
Response
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<state> See write command
Read command
AT+CGACT?
The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined
PDP contexts.
Response
+CGACT: <cid>, <state> [<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<cid> See write command
<state> See write command
Write command
AT+CGACT=
[<state>[,<cid>[,<cid>
[,...]]]]
This command is used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP con-
text(s). After the command has completed, the MT remains in V.25ter com-
mand state. If any PDP context is already in the requested state, the state
for that context remains unchanged. If the MT is not GPRS attached when
the activation form of the command is executed, the MT first performs a
GPRS attach and them attempts to activate the specified contexts. If no
<cid>s are specified the activation/deactivation form of the command acti-
vates/deactivates all defined contexts.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<state> indicates the state of PDP context activation
0 – deactivated
1 – activated
<cid> PDP Context Identifier is a numeric parameter which
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The pa-
rameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in
other PDP context-related commands.
Note: The range of supported cids is returned by
AT+CGDCONT=?
Response
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
Please note that ATH deactivates a PDP context if executed on the same
logical channel (see Chapters 2.12, 6.3.2)
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 161 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.3 AT+CGDATA Enter data state
Test command
AT+CGDATA=?
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported layer 2
protocols to be used between the TE and MT.
Response
+CGDATA: (list of supported <L2P>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<L2P> See write command
Write command
+CGDATA=[<L2P>,
[<cid>[,<cid>,…]]]]
The execution command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are nec-
essary to establish communication between the TE and the network using one
or more GPRS PDP types. This may include performing a GPRS attach and
one or more PDP context activations. Commands following +CGDATA com-
mand in the AT command line shall not be processed by the MT.
Parameter
<L2P> layer 2 protocol to be used between the TE and MT
PPP or 1 for layer2 protocol PPP
<cid> PDP Context Identifier is a numeric parameter which
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The parame-
ter is local to the TE-MT interface and is used in PDP
context-related commands. If no context is specified, an
internal context 0 with default QoS (network subscribed)
and APN from EEPROM (if there is one) is used.
1
2
Response
If successful, the MT issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and en-
ters V.25ter online data state:
CONNECT
After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure
has completed successfully, the command state is re-entered and the MT re-
turns the final result code
OK
If the <L2P> parameter value is unacceptable to the MT, the MT returns an
ERROR or +CME ERROR response:
ERROR/+CME ERROR
In the event of erroneous termination or a failure to start up, the command
state is re-entered and the MT returns
NO CARRIER
or, if enabled,
+CME ERROR
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 162 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
Test command
AT+CGDCONT=?
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the
MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each
<PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.
Response
+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s), <PDP_type>,,,(list of supported
<d_comp>s), (list of supported <h_comp>s) [<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<cid> See write command
<PDP_type> See write command
<d_comp> numeric parameter that controls PDP data compres-
sion
0 off
<h_comp> numeric parameter that controls PDP header com-
pression
0 off
Read command
AT+CGDCONT?
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. If
there is no context define simply OK will be returned.
Response
+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>, <APN>, <PDP_addr>, <data_comp>,
<head_comp> [<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<cid> See write command
<PDP_type> See write command
<APN> See write command
<PDP_addr> See write command
<d_comp> See test command
<h_comp> See test command
Write command
AT+CGDCONT=[<cid>
[,<PDP_type>[,<APN>
[,<PDP_addr>]]]]
This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context
identified by the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>. A special
form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for con-
text number <cid> to become undefined. AT&F and ATZ will undefine
every context which is not active or not online.
Parameter
<cid> This PDP Context Identifier is a numeric parameter
which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
The parameter is local to the TE-MT interface and is
also used in other PDP context-related commands. If
no cid is given, nothing will be changed (neither con-
text definition nor undefinition).
1
2
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 163 of 256 15.07.2002
<PDP_type> Packet Data Protocol type is a string parameter which
specifies the type of packet data protocol:
IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)
<APN> Access Point Name is a string parameter (framed by
quotation marks) which is a logical name that is used
to select the GGSN or the external packet data net-
work. If the value is null or omitted, then the subscrip-
tion value will be requested.
<PDP_addr> String parameter that identifies the MT in the address
space applicable to the PDP (e.g. IP V4 address for
PDP type IP). If the value is null or omitted, then a
value may be provided by the TE during the PDP
startup procedure or, failing that, a dynamic address
will be requested.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 164 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.5 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum acceptable)
Test command
AT+CGQMIN=?
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the
MT supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP
type are returned on a separate line.
Response
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of sup-
ported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported
<peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s) [<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<PDP_type> String parameter of Packet Data Protocol type
IP
<precedence> See write command
<delay> See write command
<reliability> See write command
<peak> See write command
<mean> See write command
Read command
AT+CGQMIN?
Response
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. If
no minimum profile was explicitly specified for a context, simply OK will be
returned, but default values will be used for that context.
+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<cid> See write command
<precedence> See write command
<delay> See write command
<reliability> See write command
<peak> See write command
<mean> See write command
Write command
AT+CGQMIN=
[<cid>[,<precedence>
[,<delay>[,<reliability>
[,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]
This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile
which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile returned in the
Activate PDP Context Accept message.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local)
context identification parameter, <cid>.
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the mini-
mum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become undefined. In
this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.
AT&F and ATZ will undefine the minimum QoS profiles of every context
which is not active or not online.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 165 of 256 15.07.2002
Parameter
<cid> numeric PDP Context Identifier; if no cid is specified,
nothing will be changed (no profile definition / undefini-
tion)
1
2
<precedence> numeric parameter for the precedence class
0 network subscribed value
1 High Priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence classes 2 and 3
2 Normal priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence class 3
3 Low priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence classes 1 and 2
<delay> numeric parameter for the delay class
0 network subscribed value
SDU size: 128 octets:
Delay Class Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile
Delay
1 (Predictive) <0.5 <1.5
2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25
3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250
4 (Best Effort) Unspecified
SDU size: 1024 octets:
Delay Class Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile
Delay
1 (Predictive) <0.5 <1.5
2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25
3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250
4 (Best Effort) Unspecified
The delay parameter defines the end-to-end transfer delay in-
curred in the transmission of SDUs through the GPRS network(s).
<reliability> numeric parameter for the reliability class
0 network subscribed value
1 Non real-time traffic , error-sensitive application
that cannot cope with data loss
2 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application
that can cope with infrequent data loss
3 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application
that can cope with data loss, GMM/SM, and SMS
4 Real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that
can cope with data loss
5 Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive application
that can cope with data loss
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 166 of 256 15.07.2002
<peak> numeric parameter for the peak throughput class
0 network subscribed value
Peak Throughput Class Peak Throughput
(in octets per second)
1 Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s)
2 Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s)
3 Up to 4 000 (32 kbit/s)
4 Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s)
5 Up to 16 000 (128 kbit/s)
6 Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s)
7 Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s)
8 Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s)
9 Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s)
<mean> numeric parameter for the mean throughput class
0 network subscribed value
Mean Throughput Class Mean Throughput
(in octets per hour)
1 100 (~0.22 bit/s)
2 200 (~0.44 bit/s)
3 500 (~1.11 bit/s)
4 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)
5 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)
6 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)
7 10 000 (~22 bit/s)
8 20 000 (~44 bit/s)
9 50 000 (~111 bit/s)
10 100 000 (~0.22 kbit/s)
11 200 000 (~0.44 kbit/s)
12 500 000 (~1.11 kbit/s)
13 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbit/s)
14 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbit/s)
15 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbit/s)
16 10 000 000 (~22 kbit/s)
17 20 000 000 (~44 kbit/s)
18 50 000 000 (~111 kbit/s)
31 best effort.
Note: If parameters are not defined, the parameter default values depend
on the HLR-stored subscribed default values.
Definitions of parameters in GSM 02.60 and GSM 03.60 paragraph 15.2
“Quality of Service Profile“.
If some of the QoS parameters are omitted, they will keep their current
value (or the default value if not specified so far), e.g.
at+cgqmin?
OK
at+cgqmin=1,0
OK
at+cgqmin?
+CGQMIN:1,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 167 of 256 15.07.2002
at+cgqmin=1,0,0,0,1
OK
at+cgqmin?
+CGQMIN:1,0,0,0,1,0
OK
at+cgqmin=1,1
OK
at+cgqmin?
+CGQMIN:1,1,0,0,1,0
OK
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 168 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.6 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
Test command
AT+CGQREG=?
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the MT
supports several PDP types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type
are returned on a separate line.
Response
+CGQREG: <PDP_type>, (list of supported <precedence>s), (list of sup-
ported <delay>s), (list of supported <reliability>s), (list of supported
<peak>s), (list of supported <mean>s) [<CR><LF>+CGQREG: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<PDP_type> String parameter of Packet Data Protocol type
IP
<precedence> See write command
<delay> See write command
<reliability> See write command
<peak> See write command
<mean> See write command
Read command
AT+CGQREG?
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. If
no requested profile was explicitly specified for a context, simply OK will be
returned, but default values will be used for that context.
Response
+CGQREG: <cid>, <precedence>, <delay>, <reliability>, <peak>, <mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQREG: ...]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
<cid> See write command
<precedence> See write command
<delay> See write command
<reliability> See write command
<peak> See write command
<mean> See write command
Write command
AT+CGQREG=
[<cid>[,<precedence>
,<delay>[,<reliability>[
,<peak>[,<mean>]]]]]]
This command allows the TE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is
used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the
network.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the (local)
context identification parameter, <cid>.
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the re-
quested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
AT&F and ATZ will undefine the QoS profiles of every context which is not
active or not online.
Parameter
<cid> numeric PDP Context Identifier; if no cid is specified, nothing
will be changed (neither profile definition nor undefinition)
1
2
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 169 of 256 15.07.2002
<precedence> numeric parameter for the precedence class
0 network subscribed value
1 High Priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence classes 2 and 3
2 Normal priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence class 3
3 Low priority
Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of
precedence classes 1 and 2
<delay> numeric parameter for the delay class
0 network subscribed value
SDU size: 128 octets:
Delay Class Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile
Delay
1 (Predictive) <0.5 <1.5
2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25
3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250
4 (Best Effort) Unspecified
SDU size: 1024 octets:
Delay Class Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile
Delay
1 (Predictive) <0.5 <1.5
2 (Predictive) < 5 < 25
3 (Predictive) < 50 < 250
4 (Best Effort) Unspecified
The delay parameter defines theend-to-end transfer delay incurred
in the transmission of SDUs through the GPRS network(s).
<reliability> numeric parameter for the reliability class
0 network subscribed value
1 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that
cannot cope with data loss
2 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that-
can cope with infrequent data loss
3 Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that
can cope with data loss, GMM/SM, and SMS
4 Real-time traffic, error-sensitive application that can
cope with data loss
5 Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive application that
can cope with data loss
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 170 of 256 15.07.2002
<peak> numeric parameter for the peak throughput class
0 network subscribed value
Peak Throughput Class Peak Throughput
(in octets per second)
1 Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s).
2 Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s).
3 Up to 4 000 (32 kbit/s).
4 Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s).
5 Up to 16 000 (128 kbit/s).
6 Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s).
7 Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s).
8 Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s).
9 Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s).
<mean> numeric parameter for the mean throughput class
0 network subscribed value
Mean Throughput Class Mean Throughput
(in octets per hour)
1 100 (~0.22 bit/s)
2 200 (~0.44 bit/s)
3 500 (~1.11 bit/s)
4 1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)
5 2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)
6 5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)
7 10 000 (~22 bit/s)
8 20 000 (~44 bit/s)
9 50 000 (~111 bit/s)
10 100 000 (~0.22 kbit/s)
11 200 000 (~0.44 kbit/s)
12 500 000 (~1.11 kbit/s)
13 1 000 000 (~2.2 kbit/s)
14 2 000 000 (~4.4 kbit/s)
15 5 000 000 (~11.1 kbit/s)
16 10 000 000 (~22 kbit/s)
17 20 000 000 (~44 kbit/s)
18 50 000 000 (~111 kbit/s)
31 best effort.
Note: If parameters are not defined, the parameter default values depend on
the HLR-stored subscribed default values.
If some of the QoS parameters are omitted, then they will keep their current
value (or the default value if not specified so far), e.g.
at+cgqreq?
OK
at+cgqreq=1,0
OK
at+cgqreq?
+CGQREQ:1,0,0,0,0,0
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 171 of 256 15.07.2002
at+cgqreq=1,0,0,1
OK
at+cgqreq?
+CGQREQ:1,0,0,1,0,0
OK
at+cgqreq=1,1
OK
at+cgqreq?
+CGQREQ:1,1,0,1,0,0
OK
Definitions of parameters in GSM 02.60 and GSM 03.60 paragraph 15.2
“Quality of Service Profile“.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 172 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.7 AT+CGSMS Select service for MO SMS messages
Test command
AT+CGSMS=?
The test command lists the services and service preferences which can be
selected with the AT+CGSMS write command.
Response
+CGSMS: (list of supported <service>s
OK
Parameter
<service> See write command
Read command
AT+CGSMS?
The read command returns the currently selected service or service prefer-
ence.
Response
+CGSMS: <service>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
<service> See write command
Write command
AT+CGSMS=
[<service>]
The write command specifies what service or service preference the MT
shall use when sending MO SMS messages. If parameter <service> is not
given, the current value remains unchanged.
Parameter
<service> a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service
preference to be used.
0 GPRS
1 circuit switched
2 GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if mobile is not
GPRS attached or during a CS call)
3 circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched is
not available)
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note:
· Default value is 3 (circuit switched preferred).
· Parameter cannot be stored to user profile (AT&W).
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 173 of 256 15.07.2002
6.1.8 AT^SGAUTH Set type of authentication for PPP connection
Test command
AT^SGAUTH=?
Response
^SGAUTH: (list of supported <auth>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<auth> indicates types of supported authentication
0 None
1 PAP
2 CHAP
3 PAP and CHAP
Read command
AT^SGAUTH?
Response
+CGACT: <auth>
OK/ ERROR/ + CME ERROR
Parameter
See test command
Write command
AT^SGAUTH=
<auth>
Response
OK/ ERROR/ + CME ERROR
Parameter
See test command
Reference
Siemens
Note:
· Power on default value is 3 (PAP and CHAP)
· Parameter cannot be stored using AT&W
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 174 of 256 15.07.2002
6.2 Modem compatibility commands to MTs supporting GPRS
This subclause describes how existing AT commands, designed for use with a modem, may be used
to control a GPRS MT. This is to provide backwards compatibility with existing communications soft-
ware.
6.3 ATD *99# Request GPRS service
Execute command
ATD*99[*[<called_address>]
[*[<L2P>][*[<cid>]]]]#
This command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are nec-
essary to establish communication between the TE and the external
PDN.
The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter
online data state and, with the TE, to start the specified layer 2 proto-
col. No further commands may follow on the AT command line. GPRS
attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place
prior to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been per-
formed using the +CGATT (see Chapter 6.1.1) and +CGACT (see
Chapter 6.1.2) commands. If the context to be used is already acti-
vated, it will be deactivated first. This ensures that the right context
parameters will be used (e.g. QoS changes since the last context ac-
tivation or the called address specified by ATD).
Examples on how to use this command are provided in chapter 6.5.
Response
To confirm acceptance of the command to entering the V.25ter online
data state:
CONNECT
When the layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an or-
derly shut down of the PDP or an error, the MT enters V.25ter com-
mand state and returns
NO CARRIER
Parameter
<called_address>
IP V4 address in the form w.x.y.z, see chapter “Using the
GPRS dial command ATD“, pg. 179 which identifies the
called party; if it is provided, the MT will automatically set up
a virtual call to the specified address after the context has
been activated. This parameter is currently not used and
needs not be specified.
<L2P> layer 2 protocol to be used between the TE and MT
PPP or layer2 for PPP protocol
<cid>: numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no context is
specified, an internal context 0 with default QoS (network
subscribed) and APN from EEPROM (if there is one) is
used.
1
2
Note: The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may be used prior
to set values for cid, PDP type, APN, QoS etc..
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
ATD is used as a standard V.25ter AT Command, too.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 175 of 256 15.07.2002
6.3.1 ATD *98# Request GPRS IP service
Execute command
ATD*98[*<cid>]#
This command causes the MT to perform whatever actions are necessary to
establish a communication between the TE and the external PDN.
The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the MT to enter the V.25ter online data
state and, with the TE, to start the layer 2 protocol.
GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior
to or during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the
+CGATT (see Chapter 6.1.1) and +CGACT (see Chapter 6.1.2) commands. If
the context to be used is already activated, it will be deactivated first. This en-
sures that the right context parameters will be used (e.g. QoS changes since
the last context activation).
Note: An example of how to use this command can be seen in chapter 6.5
Response
To confirm acceptance of the command to entering the V.25ter online data
state:
CONNECT
When the layer 2 protocol has terminated, either as a result of an orderly shut
down of the PDP or an error, the MT enters V.25ter command state and return
NO CARRIER
Parameter
<cid>: numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition
(see +CGDCONT command). If no context is specified, an internal
context 0 with default QoS (network subscribed) and APN from
EEPROM (if there is one) is used.
1
2
Note: The +CGDCONT, +CGQREQ, etc. commands may be used prior to set
values for cid, PDP type, APN, QoS etc..
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note:
ATD is used as a standard V.25ter AT-Command, too.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 176 of 256 15.07.2002
6.3.2 ATH Manual rejection of a network request for PDP context activation
Execute command
ATH
Response
The V.25ter 'H' or 'H0' (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network
request for PDP context activation announced by the unsolicited result code
RING
or
+CRING: GPRS <PDP_type>,<PDP_addr>
The MT responds with
OK
Reference
GSM 07.07
Note
· In contrast to GSM 07.07 it is possible to cancel a connection with ATH after
a break. This is done for compatibility reasons due to the “dial-up network“
(“DFÜ-Netzwerk“) drivers of Microsoftã Windowsâ.
· ATH is used as a standard V.25ter AT Command, too. See Chapter 2.12.
· If any PDP context is activated, then it will be deactivated. In Mulitplex
mode, ATH only clears the active PDP context on the same channel where
ATH was issued.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 177 of 256 15.07.2002
6.4 Using GPRS AT commands (examples)
6.4.1 Miscellaneous AT commands
Defining and using a Context Definition Id (CID):
Every time a CID is used as a parameter for a GPRS command the CID has to be defined before by
the AT+CGDCONT command. To get the parameter of a CID use the AT+CGDCONT read option. If
the response of ‘AT+CGDCONT?’ is OK only, there is no CID defined.
AT+CGDCONT?
OK // there is no CID defined
All parameters of the CID are initiated by NULL or not present values and the CID itself is set to be
undefined. To define a CID use the AT+CGDCONT Command with at least one CID parameter. At the
moment the mobile supports CID 1 and CID 2 by using the AT+CGDCONT command.
Examples:
AT+CGDCONT=1,IP
OK // defines CID 1and sets the PDP type to IP
// access point name and IP address aren't set
AT+CGDCONT=2,IP, "internet.t-d1.gprs", 111.222.123.234
OK // defines CID 2 ans sets PDP type, APN and IP addr
A following read command will respond
AT+CGDCONT?
+CGDCONT:1,IP
+CGDCONT:2,IP," internet.t-d1.gprs",111.222.123.234
OK
AT+CGDCONT=1
OK // sets the CID 1 to be undefined
A following read command will respond
AT+CGDCONT?
+CGDCONT:2,IP, "internet.t-d1.gprs",111.222.123.234
OK
Quality of Service (QoS) is a special parameter of a CID which consists of several parameters itself.
The QoS consists of
· the precedence class
· the delay class
· the reliability class
· the peak throughput class
· the mean throughput class
and is devided in "requested QoS" and "minimum acceptable QoS".
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 178 of 256 15.07.2002
All parameters of the QoS are initiated by default to the "network subscribed value (= 0)" but the QoS
itself is set to be undefined. To define a QoS use the AT+CGQREQ or AT+CGQMIN command.
Examples:
AT+CGQREQ=1,2
OK // overwrites the precedence class of QoS of CID 1 and sets
// the QoS of CID 1 to be present
A following read command will response
AT+CGQREQ?
+CGQREQ: 1,2,0,0,0,0
OK // all QoS values of CID 1 are set to network subscribed
// except precedence class which is set to 2
AT+CGQREQ=1
OK // set the QoS of CID 1 to not present
Once defined, the CID it can be activated. To activate a CID use
AT+CGACT=1,2
OK // activate CID 2
If the CID is already active, the mobile responses OK at once.
If no CID is given, all defined CIDs will be activated by
AT+CGACT= // NO CID and NO STATE given
OK // all defined CIDs will be activated
If no CID is defined the mobile responses +CME ERROR: invalid index
Remark: If the mobile is NOT attached by AT+CGATT=1 before activating, the attach is automatically
done by the AT+CGACT command.
After defining and activating a CID it may be used to get online by
AT+CGDATA=PPP,1
CONNECT // the mobile is connected using the parameters of CID 1
AT+CDATA=
CONNECT // the mobile is connected using default parameter
The mobile supports Layer 2 Protocol (L2P) PPP only.
Remark: If the mobile is NOT attached by AT+CGATT=1 and the CID is NOT activated before con-
necting, attaching and activating is automatically done by the AT+CGDATA command.
Some providers (e.g. D2 or E-Plus) require to use an APN to establish a GPRS connection. So if you
use the Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Network and ATD*9... to connect to GPRS you must provide the
context definition as part of the modem definition (Modem properties/Connection/Advanced.../Extra
settings). As an alternative, you can define and activate the context in a terminal program (e.g. Micro-
soft Hyperterminal) and then use the Dial-Up Network to send only the ATD command.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 179 of 256 15.07.2002
6.5 Using the GPRS dial command ATD
In addition to the GPRS AT Commands you can use the "D" command to dial into to the GPRS net-
work.
There are two GPRS Service Codes for the ATD Command: Values 98 and 99.
Examples:
ATD*99#
CONNECT // establish a connection by service code 99
ATD*99*123.124.125.126*PPP*1#
CONNECT // establish a connection by service code 99, IP address 123…
//and L2P = PPP and using CID 1.
// The CID has to be defined by AT+CGDCONT
ATD*99**PPP#
CONNECT // establish a connection by service code 99 and L2P = PPP
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT // establish a connection by service code 99 and using CID 1
ATD*99**PPP*1#
CONNECT // establish a connection by service code 99 and L2P = PPP and
// using CID 1. The CID has to be defined by AT+CGDCONT
ATD*98#
CONNECT // establish an IP connection by service code 98
ATD*98*1#
CONNECT // establish an IP connection by service code 98 using CID 1
// The CID has to be defined by AT+CGDCONT
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 180 of 256 15.07.2002
7 AT Commands for SIM Application Toolkit (GSM 11.14)
SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) is a technology that lets the SIM card execute a great variety of addi-
tional applications. Conventionally, SIM cards are intended to store user specific data, such as phone-
books, secure user identification codes and messages, but they can also hold a lot of value-added
mobile applications.
The SAT functionality integrated in MC35 and MC35T allows to execute network specific applications
implemented on the SIM card. Typical examples are online banking and information services.
The commands exchanged between SAT and the SIM application fall into two categories:
· Proactive commands – sent from the SIM application to the module’s SAT, e.g. DISPLAY TEXT.
· Envelope commands – sent from the module's SAT to the SIM application, e.g. MENU SELEC-
TION.
The SAT implementation supports SAT class 3, GSM 11.14 Release 98, no support of letter classes.
GSM 11.14 describes Proactive and Envelope Commands in detail.
Note: To give you an idea, this chapter contains a brief overview of the AT commands and re-
sponses related to the SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) implementation. The full set of SAT spe-
cific AT commands and a detailed descripton of the SAT functions is provided in a separate
documentation: the "MC35 Remote-SAT User's Guide" supplied with MC35 and MC35 Termi-
nal. Please contact your local dealer or Siemens AG for details.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 181 of 256 15.07.2002
7.1 AT^SSTA Remote-SAT Interface Activation
Test command
AT^SSTA=?
Response
^SSTA:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <alphabet>s)
Parameter description see below.
Read command
AT^SSTA?
The read command can be used to request the current operating status and the
used alphabet of the Remote-SAT interface.
Response
^SSTA:<state>,<alphabet>,<allowedInstance>,<SatProfile>
<state> device state:
<allowedInstance>
0 SAT is already used on an other instance (logical channel in
case of the multiplex protocol). Only test and read com-
mands can be used.
1 SAT may be started on this instance via the write version of
this command (see below).
<SatProfile>
SAT profile according to GSM 11.14.
The profile tells the SIM application which features are
supported by the SIM Application Toolkit implemented by the
ME.
Write command
AT^SSTA=
<mode>
[,<Alphabet>]
The write command is used to activate the AT command interface to the SIM
Application Toolkit in the ME, and must be issued after every power on. How-
ever, removing and inserting the SIM does not affect the activation status.
SAT commands which are not using the AT interface (non MMI related SAT
commands , e.g. PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION) may be executed without
activating Remote-SAT.
Response
OK
Parameter
<mode>
1 Activate Remote-SAT (to enter state IDLE)
<Alphabet>
0 ANSI character set
Input of a character requests one byte , e.g. “Y”.
1 UCS2
To display the 16 bit value of characters represented in
UCS2 alphabet a 4 byte string is required, e.g. “0059” is cod-
ing the character “Y”. For details please refer to ISO/IEC
10646.
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 182 of 256 15.07.2002
7.2 ^SSTN Remote-SAT Notification
Proactive
Commands Every time the SIM application issues a proactive command, via the ME, the TA
will receive a notification. This indicates the type of proactive command issued.
AT^SSTGI must then be used by the TA to request the parameters of the proac-
tive command from the ME.
Upon receiving the ^SSTGI response from the ME, the TA must send AT^SSTR
to confirm the execution of the proactive command and provide any required user
response, e.g. selected menu item.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <cmdType>
Parameters
<cmdType> Proactive command ID
Terminate
Proactive
Command
When the SIM application has issued a proactive command, via the ME, to the
TA, it is possible that this command must be terminated. The ^SSTN Unsolicited
Result Code is sent but with a different command type to indicate the termination
of the specified command.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <cmdTerminateValue>
Parameters
<cmdTerminateValue> Terminate proactive command ID
SIM Applica-
tion returns to
main menu
Notification to the TA when the SIM Application has finished a command cycle
and again enters its main menue.
This URC should be used to open this menue on the sreen.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <254>
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 183 of 256 15.07.2002
7.3 AT^SSTGI Remote-SAT Get Information
Test command
AT^SSTGI=?
Response
^SSTGI:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <cmdType>s)
OK
Read command
AT^SSTGI?
Response
^SSTGI: <state>, <cmdType>
OK
Parameters
<state> Remote-SAT interface states (refer to AT^SSTA)
<cmdType> Ongoing Proactive Command
Write command
AT^SSTGI=
<cmdType>
Regularly this Write command is used upon receipt of an unsolicited result code
^SSTN:<cmdType>.
The TA is expected to acknowledge the ^SSTGI response with AT^SSTR to
confirm that the proactive command has been executed.
AT^SSTR will also provide any user information, e.g. a selected menu item.
The command type value is returned to the ME to identify which ^SSTN is being
responded to.
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 184 of 256 15.07.2002
7.4 AT^SSTR Remote-SAT Response
Test command
AT^SSTR=?
Response
^SSTR:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <cmdType>s)
OK
Read command
AT^SSTR?
Response
^SSTR: <state>, <cmdType>
OK
Parameters
<state> Remote-SAT interface state
<cmdType> Ongoing Proactive Command
Write command
AT^SSTR=
<cmdType>,
<status>
[,<itemId>]
[,<inputString>]
The TA is expected to acknowledge the ^SSTGI response with AT^SSTR to
confirm that the proactive command has been executed.
AT^SSTR will also provide any user information, e.g. a selected menu item.
Response
OK
Parameters
<cmdType> Number related to Proactive command or event type
<status> Command status return regarding the type of action that has
taken place, e.g. action performed by the user.
<itemId> id of menu item selected by user
<inputString> string response entered by user
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 185 of 256 15.07.2002
8 Siemens defined AT commands for enhanced functions
Self-defined commands do not have to be implemented in accordance with the official syntax. The
“+C” string can therefore be replaced by “^S” (“^” = 0x5E). If a self-defined command with the same
syntax will be included in future in the GSM recommendations, the command can be addressed with
both strings.
8.1 AT+CXXCID Display card ID (identical to AT^SCID)
Test command
AT+CXXCID=?
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
AT+CXXCID
Response
TA returns the card identification number in SIM (SIM file EF ICCID, see
GSM 11.11 Chap.10.1.1) as string type.
See ^SCID
Parameter
See ^SCID
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 186 of 256 15.07.2002
8.2 AT^MONI Monitor idle mode and dedicated mode
Test command
AT^MONI=?
Response
^MONI: (list of supported < period >s) OK
Write command
AT^MONI[=<pe
riod>]
This command can be used to retrieve information of the serving/dedicated cell
automatically every n seconds. It is cancelled by any character sent to serial port
except if autobauding is enabled (+IPR=0). Then type character ´a´ to abort.
Note:
The two header lines (see below) are output after every ten data lines.
Response
See execute command
Parameter
<period> 1 – 254 Display period in seconds
Execute command
AT^MONI
This command can be used to retrieve the cell parameters of the serving/dedicated
cell on request.
Note:
The length of following output lines exceeds 80 characters. Therefore a terminal
program may draw a carriage return on a screen. However, this is not part of the
response.
Response (Examples)
ME is not connected:
a) ME is camping on a cell
Serving Cell I Dedicated channel
chann rs dBm PLMN LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR dBm Q ChMod
1013 21 -71 00101 1001 0103 7 7 33 -105 33 I No connection
b) ME camping on a cell, but searching for a better cell (cell reselection)
Serving Cell I Dedicated channel
chann rs dBm PLMN LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR dBm Q ChMod
1013 4 –106 00101 1001 0103 7 7 33 -105 -1 I in Reselecting
c) ME is not camping on a cell and could not (yet) find a suitable cell
Serving Cell I Dedicated channel
chann rs dBm PLMN LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR dBm Q ChMod
ME is connected:
Serving Cell I Dedicated channel
chann rs dBm PLMN LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR dBm Q ChMod
1013 19 -76 00101 1001 0103 7 7 33 -105 33 I 1015 1 0 5 -76 0 S_HR
Parameters Serving Cell:
chann ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the BCCH carrier
rs RSSI value 0 – 63 (RSSI = Received signal strength indication)
dBm receiving level of the BCCH carrier in dBm
PLMN PLMN ID code
LAC location area code, see note below.
cell cell ID, see note below.
NCC PLMN colour code
BCC base station colour code
PWR maximal power level used on RACH channel in dBm
RXLev minimal receiving level (in dBm) to allow registration
C1 coefficient for base station selection
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 187 of 256 15.07.2002
Dedicated channel:
chann ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the TCH carrier
Note: <chann> = h indicates frequency hopping.
TS timeslot number
timAdv timing advance in bits
PWR current power level
dBm receiving level of the traffic channel carrier in dBm
Q receiving quality (0–7)
ChMod channel mode (S_HR: Half rate, S_FR: Full rate, S_EFR: Enhanced Full
Rate)
Reference
Siemens
Note
· The parameters LAC and cell are presented as hexadecimal digits, the remain-
ing parameters are composed of decimal digits.
· If the radio cell changes during a connection, the parameters PWR and RXLev
of the ‘Serving Cell’ part cannot be updated under certain conditions and, there-
fore, are left blank (see also +CREG, pg 123). This is because the ME does not
update the cell selection and reselection parameters since, in this mode, they
are not relevant for operation. When the connections ends, and the ME is back
to IDLE mode, both parameters will be updated.
If the radio cell changes during a connection, it normally takes 1 or 2 seconds
to update the parameter cell. Until the Cell ID is received from the new base
station, the default value 0000 will be shown instead.
· If the BS supports frequency hopping during a connection, the dedicated chan-
nel (parameter chann) is not stable. This mode is indicated by chann = ‘h’.
· The cell information can be issued in the form of unsolicited result codes (re-
lated to <period>), or it can be queried directly using the Execute command
AT^MONI. In the first case, the ME activates its RING line (Logic “1”) for one
second to send the URC to the connected application. In the second case, the
RING line does not change.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 188 of 256 15.07.2002
8.3 AT^MONP Monitor neighbour cells
Test command
AT^MONP=?
Response
^MONP: (list of supported < period >s) OK
Write command
AT^MONP=[<period>]
This command can be used to retrieve information of up to six neighbour
cells automatically every n seconds. It is cancelled by any character sent
to the serial port except if autobauding is enabled (+IPR=0). Then type
character ´a´ to abort.
Response
See execute command
Parameter
<period> 1 – 254 Display period in seconds
Execute command
AT^MONP
This command can be used to obtain information of up to six neighbour
cells on request.
Response (Example)
Parameter:
Chann ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the BCCH
carrier
rs RSSI value 0 – 63 (RSSI = Received signal strength indication)
dBm Receiving level in dBm
PLMN PLMN ID code
BCC Base Station colour code
C1 coefficient for base station selection
C2 coefficient for base station reselection
Reference
Siemens
Note
· Cell information can be issued in the form of unsolicited result codes
(related to <period>), or it can be queried directly using the Execute
command AT^MONI. In the first case, the ME activates its RING line
(Logic “1”) for one second to send the URC to the connected applica-
tion. In the second case, the RING line does not change.
· Due to the fact that not all necessary information of the neighbour cells
can be decoded during a connection, there are several constraints to
be considered:
- Only neighbour cells that have already been visible in IDLE mode
will be further updated, as long as they are still included in the list.
- Though new neighbour cells can be added to the list (e.g. due to
handover), their C1 and C2 parameters cannot be displayed until
the connection is released. In this case “-“ is presented for C1 and
C2.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 189 of 256 15.07.2002
8.4 AT^SACM Advice of charge and query of ACM and ACMmax
Test command
AT^SACM=?
Response
^SACM: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Execute command
AT^SACM
The execute command can be used to query the current mode of the Advice of
Charge supplementary service, the SIM values of the accumulated call meter
(ACM) and accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax).
Response
^SACM: <n>,<acm>,<acm_max> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n> See write command
<acm> ACM, string type; three bytes of the current ACM value in hexadeci-
mal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000–
FFFFFF
<acm_max> ACMmax, string type; three bytes of the max. ACM value in hexade-
cimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000 dis-
able ACMmax feature 000001-FFFFFF
<ccm> string type; three bytes of the current CCM value in hexadecimal for-
mat (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); bytes are coded in
the same way as ACMmax value in the SIM 000000-FFFFFF
Write command
AT^SACM=<n>
The write command enables or disables the presentation of unsolicited result to
report the call charges.
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n> 0 suppress unsolicited result code
1 display unsolicited result code
When you power down or reset the ME with AT+CFUN=1,1 the URC
presentation mode will be reset to its default. To benefit from the
URC it is recommended to have the setting included in the user pro-
file saved with AT&W, or to select <n>=1 every time you reboot the
ME.
Unsolicited result code
When activated, an unsolicited result code is sent when the CCM value changes,
but not more often than every 10 seconds
+CCCM: <ccm>
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also GSM07.07: AT+CACM, AT+CAMM, AT+CAOC
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 190 of 256 15.07.2002
8.5 AT^SBC Battery charging / discharging and charge control
This chapter is only applicable to MC35, it is not intended for MC35 Terminal.
Responses returned by the AT^SBC command vary with the operating mode of the ME:
Normal mode: ME is switched on by Ignition pin and running the SLEEP, IDLE,
TALK or DATA mode. Charger is not connected. AT^SBC can be
used to query the battery capacity and the power consumption of
ME and application (if value of application was specified before as
<current>).
Normal mode + charging: Allows charging while ME is switched on by Ignition pin and running
the SLEEP, IDLE, TALK or DATA mode. AT^SBC returns charger
status and power consumption of ME / application. Battery capacity
is not available.
Charge-only mode: Allows charging while ME is detached from GSM network. When
started, the mode is indicated by the URC "^SYSSTART CHARGE-
ONLY MODE". AT^SBC returns charger status and power consump-
tion of ME / application. Percentage of battery capacity is not avail-
able. In Charge-only mode a limited number of AT commands is ac-
cessible (see Table 11). There are several ways to activate the
Charge-only mode:
a) from Power Down mode: Connect charger while ME was powered
down with AT^SMSO
b) from Normal mode: Connect charger, then enter AT^SMSO.
Alarm mode: No charging functionality, i.e. charging does not start even though
the charger connects to the POWER lines. Battery parameters are
not available.
Charging begins once the charger connects to the POWER pins of the ZIF connector (except for the
Alarm mode). Please refer to the [1] for details on the charging process.
Test command
AT^SBC=?
Response
^SBC: (list of supported <bcs>s),(list of supported <bcl>s),<mpc> module power
consumption
Defined values
<bcs> 0 No charging adapter is connected
1 Charging adapter is connected
2 Charging adapter is connected, charging in progress
3 Charging adapter is connected, charging has finished
4 Charging error, charging is interrupted
5 False charging temperature, charging is interrupted while
temperature is beyond allowed range
<bcl> Battery capacity
0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 percent of remaining capacity (6 steps)
0 indicates that either the battery is exhausted or the capacity value
is not available
<mpc> Average power consumption:
Value (0...5000) of average power consumption (mean value over a
couple of seconds) in mA. See read and write command for details.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 191 of 256 15.07.2002
Read command
AT^SBC?
Response
^SBC: <bcs>,<bcl>,<mpc>
<bcs> Connection status of battery pack
<bcl> Battery charge level
While charging is in progress (charging adapter connected) the
battery capacity is not available. Consequently, parameter <bcl>=0.
To query the battery capacity disconnect the charger.
<mpc> Average power consumption
<mpc> is obtained from the ME's power consumption, plus the value
you have specified for the application by using the write command
AT^SBC=<current>. Remember that the ME's power consumption
varies with its operating mode (IDLE, TALK, DATA, GPRS/DATA)
and the power level.
If <current> was not yet specified and no battery pack NTC is
detected <mpc> returns only the module's present power
consumption.
If <current> was not yet specified, but the NTC of the connected
battery pack is detected, an offset value of 200mA will, by default, be
added. 200mA is an estimated value which represents the power
consumption of a typical external application. Drawn from practical
experience it serves as a precaution to ensure proper charging in
case you have not entered <current>. It is strongly recommended
that you enter the correct power consumption of your application as
described below.
Note: If the battery does not incorporate an NTC, or the battery and
the NTC are not compliant with the requirements specified in [1], the
battery cannot be detected by the ME.
Write command
AT^SBC=
<current>
Use the write command to specify the power consumption of your external appli-
cation. This information enables the ME to calculate the average power consump-
tion <mpc> and to properly control the charging process. If the value is not correct
the entire charging process may be affected. Resulting problems may be wrong
responses to the AT^SBC read command, overcharging, or the battery does not
reach full capacity.
The write command registers the serial port as the output channel for unsolicited
result codes related to charging.
When the ME is powered down or reset, the value of <current> is restored to its
default. This affects the charging control and disables the presentation of unsolic-
ited result codes. Therefore, the parameter should be set every time when
needed after rebooting the ME.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<current> Enter the current consumption of your application in mA (0...5000). If
used, the current provided over the by 2.9V VDD pin of the ZIF inter-
face (maximum 70mA) must be added, too.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 192 of 256 15.07.2002
Unsolicited result code
^SBC: Undervoltage
The message will be reported, for example, when you attempt to set up a call
while the voltage is close to the critical limit and further power loss is caused dur-
ing the transmit burst. To remind you that the battery needs to be charged soon,
the URC appears several times before the module switches off.
When the module is in IDLE mode it takes typically one minute to deregister from
the network and to switch off.
Undervoltage protection in mains operated applications:
· The undervoltage protection is also efficient in applications which are not bat-
tery operated, i.e. in applications where the ACCU_TEMP pin is not con-
nected. To use this feature it is sufficient to issue the write command which
automatically enables the presentation of URCs. You do not need to specify
<current>. Please note, that in contrast to battery powered applications, the
ME will present the undervoltage URC only once and will then switch off with-
out sending any further messages.
Reference
Siemens
Note
· If Multiplex mode is active, any virtual channel can be used to enter the write
command and to specify <current>. The undervoltage URC appears simulta-
neously on all three channels.
· The URC "^SYSSTART CHARGE-ONLY MODE" is indicated automatically
when the engine enters this mode (except when autobauding is active). Unlike
the undervoltage URC, it cannot be disabled or enabled by the user.
Table 11: Summary of AT commands available in Charge-only and Alarm mode
AT command Use
AT+CALA Set alarm time
AT+CCLK Set date and time of RTC
AT^SBC Monitor charging process
Note: While charging is in progress, no battery capacity value is available. To
query the battery capacity disconnect the charger. If the charger connects exter-
nally to the host device no charging parameters are transferred to the module. In
this case, the command cannot be used.
AT^SCTM Query temperature of GSM engine, enable or disable URCs
AT^SMSO Power down GSM engine
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 193 of 256 15.07.2002
8.6 AT^SCID Display SIM card identification number
Test command
AT^SCID=?
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
AT^SCID
Response
TA returns the identification number of the SIM card (see GSM 11.11 Chapter
10.1.1).
^SCID: <cid> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<cid> string type: card identification number of SIM card
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 194 of 256 15.07.2002
8.7 AT^SCKS Set SIM connection presentation mode and query SIM con-
nection status
Test command
AT^SCKS=?
Response
^SCKS: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SCKS?
Response
TA returns the URC presentation mode and the status of the SIM card connection.
^SCKS: <n>, <m> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SCKS=<n>
Response
TA enables or disables the presentation of URCs to report whether or not the SIM
card is connected.
When the ME is powered down or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1 the presentation
mode <n> will not be restored to ist default. To benefit from the URCs, it is rec-
ommended to have the setting <n>=1 included in the user profile saved with
AT&W, or activate the setting every time you reboot the ME.
OK
Parameter
<n> 0 Suppress unsolicited result codes
1 Output unsolicited result codes
<m> 0 No card
1 Card in card reader
Unsolicited result code
When the status "SIM connected" has changed, an unsolicited result code is sent
to the TE.
^SCKS: <m>
Parameter
See write command
Reference
Siemens
Note
Note that the connection status of <m>reflects only the status of the card holder
tray. If an empty SIM card tray is inserted, two URCs will be output, indicating the
status 1 and 0 (= SIM card connected and not connected).
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 195 of 256 15.07.2002
8.8 AT^SCNI List Call Number Information
Test command
AT^SCNI=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^SCNI
Response
TA returns a list of current calls of ME.
[^SCNI: <id1>[,<cs>[,<number>,<type>]]]
[^SCNI: <id2>[,<cs>[,<number>,<type>]]]
[...] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<idx> 1–7 integer type; call identification number as described in GSM
02.30[19] subclause 4.5.5.1; this number can be used in
+CHLD command operations
<cs> Call status of respective call number (first parameter)
0 call hold
1 call in progress
2 Waiting call
<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type> type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialling string
includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also GSM 07.07: AT+CLCC
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 196 of 256 15.07.2002
8.9 AT^SCTM Set critical operating temperature presentation mode or
query temperature
Use this command to monitor the temperature range of the module and the battery. The write com-
mand enables or disables the presentation of URCs to report critical temperature limits.
CAUTION: During the first 15 seconds after start-up, the module operates in an automatic report
mode: URCs can be always displayed regardless of the selected mode <n>.
Test command
AT^SCTM=?
Response
^SCTM: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SCTM?
Response
TA returns the URC presentation mode and information about the current tem-
perature range of the module. Please note that the Read command does not indi-
cate the temperature range of the battery. The battery temperature can only be
reported by an Unsolicited Result Code.
^SCTM: <n>, <m> OK
Parameters
<n> 0 Presentation of URCs is disabled (except for <m> equal to –2 or +2).
1 Presentation of URCs is enabled.
<m> -2 Below lowest temperature limit (causes immediate switch-off)
-1 Below low temperature alert limit
0 Normal operating temperature
1 Above upper temperature alert limit
2 Above uppermost temperature limit (causes immediate switch-off)
Write command
AT^SCTM=<n>
Select <n> to enable or disable the presentation of the URCs. Please note that the
setting will not be stored upon Power Down, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
<n>=0 will be restored. To benefit from the URCs <n>=1 needs to be selected
every time you reboot the GSM engine.
Response
OK
Parameters
<n> 0 Suppress URCs (except for <m> equal to –2 or +2)
1 Enable presentation of URCs.
Please see notes below for further details.
Unsolicited result code
URCs will be automatically sent to the TA when the temperature reaches or ex-
ceeds the critical level, or when it is back to normal.
^SCTM_A: <m> for battery temperature
^SCTM_B: <m> for module (board) temperature
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 197 of 256 15.07.2002
Reference
Siemens
Note
Important:
· Please refer to [1] for specifications on critical temperature ranges.
· To avoid damage the module will shut down once the critical temperature is
exceeded. The procedure is equivalent to the power-down initiated with
AT^SMSO.
· URCs indicating the alert level "1" or "-1" are intended to enable the user to
take appropriate precautions, such as protect the module or battery from expo-
sure to extreme conditions, or save or back up data etc. The presentation of "1"
or "-1" URCs depends on the settings selected with the write command:
If <n>=0: Presentation is enabled for 15 s time after the module was switched
on. After 15 s operation, the presentation will be disabled, i.e. no URCs will be
generated.
If <n>= 1: Presentation of "1" or "-1" URCs is always enabled.
· Level "2" or "-2" URCs are followed by immediate shutdown. The presentation
of these URCs is always enabled, i.e. they will be output even though the fac-
tory setting AT^SCTMC=0 was never changed.
· If the temperature limit is exceeded while an emergency call is in progress the
engine continues to measure the temperature and to deliver alert messages,
but deactivates the shutdown functionality. Once the call is terminated full tem-
perature control will be resumed. If the temperature is still out of range MC35
switches off immediately.
Examples URCs issued when the operating temperature is out of range:
^SCTM_A: 1 Caution: Battery close to overtemperature limit.
^SCTM_A: 2 Alert: Battery above overtemperature limit. Engine switches off.
^SCTM_B: 1 Caution: Engine close to overtemperature limit.
^SCTM_B: 2 Alert: Engine is above overtemperature limit and switches off.
^SCTM_A: -1 Caution: Battery close to undertemperature limit.
^SCTM_A: -2 Alert: Battery below undertemperature limit. Engine switches
off.
^SCTM_B: -1 Caution: Engine close to undertemperature limit.
^SCTM_B: -2 Alert: Engine is below undertemperature limit and switches off.
Example URCs issued when the temperature is back to normal (URC is output once):
^SCTM_A: 0 Battery temperature back to normal temperature.
^SCTM_B: 0 Engine back to normal temperature
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 198 of 256 15.07.2002
8.10 AT^SDLD Delete the “last number redial“ memory
Test command
AT^SDLD=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^SDLD
The execute command deletes all numbers stored in the LD memory.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Siemens
Note
8.11 AT^SHOM Display Homezone
Test command
AT^SHOM=?
Response
OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT^SHOM
Response
TA returns homezone state
^SHOM: <homezonestate> OK
Parameters
<homezonestate> 0 ME is out of Homezone
1 ME is within the Homezone
Reference
Siemens
Note
8.12 AT^SLCD Display Last Call Duration
Test command
AT^SLCD=?
Response
OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT^SLCD
Response
TA returns last call duration or current call duration
^SLCD: <time> OK
Parameter
<time> string type value; format is "hh:mm:ss", where characters indicate hours,
minutes, seconds; e.g. 22:10:00 “22:10:00",
max values are 9999:59:59
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 199 of 256 15.07.2002
8.13 AT^SLCK Facility lock
Test command
AT^SLCK=?
Response
^SLCK: (list of supported <fac>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SLCK=
<fac>,<mode>
[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
Response
This command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility
<fac>.
The command can be aborted while network facilities are being set or interro-
gated.
If <mode><>2 and command is successful
OK
If <mode>=2 and command successful
^SLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>
^SLCK: <status>, class2....]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks set by user / provider
“PS” Phone locked to SIM card (phone code). ME requests password
when other than current SIM card inserted; ME may remember cer-
tain number of previously used cards thus not requiring password
when they are inserted.
“SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). SIM requests password upon ME power-up
and when this lock command issued.
“FD” SIM fixed dialling memory: If the mobile is locked to FD, only the
numbers stored to the FD memory can be dialled (up to 7 num-
bers). PIN2 is required as <passwd>.
"CS" Keypad lock (not supported since keypad cannot be connected)
Supplementary Service: Call barring
“AO” BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” BOIC (Bar Outgoing International Calls)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
“AI” BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
“AB” All Barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AG” All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AC” All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
Factory set facility locks:
“PF” lock Phone to the very First SIM card
“PN” Network Personalisation
“PU” Network subset Personalisation
“PP” Service Provider Personalisation
“PC” Corporate Personalisation
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 200 of 256 15.07.2002
<mode> 0 unlock
1 lock
2 query status
<passwd> password
<class> integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of information:
1 voice
2 data
4 fax
8 short message service
16 data circuit sync
32 data circuit async
64 dedicated packet access
128 dedicated PAD access
x combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of the in-
tegers 1, 2 and 4 (call barring for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is omit-
ted, the default value 7 is used.
See examples in 4.21.3 for the correct handling of class numbers.
<class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and 128,
that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means, a set-
ting made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if sup-
ported). In addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific class.
For example, you can activate Call Barring for all data classes, but deac-
tivate it for a specific data class.
<status> 0 off
1 on
Reference
GSM 07.07,
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.88,
Siemens
Note
See also specification of AT+CLCK in GSM 07.07 and further details in Chapter
4.21.
The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parameters ac-
cording to the definition of “AT+CLCK” in GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of a
specific “call forwarding” facility <fac> to a specific service or service group (a
specific <class> value) please consult table A.1 of GSM 02.04.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 201 of 256 15.07.2002
8.14 AT^SMGL List SMS messages from preferred storage
Test command
AT^SMGL=?
Response
See write command + CMGL
Parameters
See command +CMGL
Execute/Write
command
AT^SMGL
[=<stat>]
Response
TA returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage <mem1> to
the TE. The status of the messages is u n c h a n g e d (unread remains unread).
Otherwise: See command +CMGL
Parameters
See command +CMGL
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also GSM 07.05: +CMGL
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 202 of 256 15.07.2002
8.15 AT^SMGO Set or query SMS overflow presentation mode or query SMS
overflow
Test command
AT^SMGO=?
Response
^SGMO: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SMGO?
Response
TA returns overflow presentation mode and SMS overflow status
^SGMO: <n>,<mode> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SMGO=<n>
Response
TA sets overflow presentation mode
OK
Parameter
<n> SMS overflow presentation mode
0 disable (default)
1 enable
<mode> SMS overflow status
0 space available
1 SMS buffer full (buffer for received short messages is <mem3>. See
AT+CPMS in Chapter 5.11.
2 Buffer full and new message waiting in SC for delivery to ME
Unsolicited result code
When the SIM overflow status changes, a URC is sent to TE. This requires a cor-
rect setting for SMS indications (AT+CNMI=3,1; see Chapter 5.10).
^SMGO: <mode>
Parameter
See write command
During data calls, a status change is indicated via a Break (100 ms). The Break
signal will be sent each time when a status change is detected.
Reference
Siemens
Note
· Incoming Class 1 short messages (ME specific) will be preferably stored to
“ME” and may be transferred to the “SM” storage if “ME” is used up. Incoming
Class 2 messages (SIM specific) will be placed to the “SM” storage only.
If messages with different classes are received, the ^SMGO: 2 indication may
be presented, without prior indication of ^SMGO: 1. The indication ^SMGO: 1
means that both buffers ("ME" and "SM") are full. See also Chapter 5.11.
· For more information regarding SIM and ME specific message classes refer to
<dcs> and the following specifications: GSM 03.38 and 3GPP TS 23.038.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 203 of 256 15.07.2002
8.16 AT^SMSO Switch off mobile station
Test command
AT^SMSO=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^SMSO
Response
^SMSO: MS OFF OK
Device will be switched off (power down mode)
Reference
Siemens
Note
Do not send any command after this command
8.17 AT^SMGR Read SMS message without set to REC READ
Test command
AT^SMGR=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^SMGR=
<index>
Parameter
See AT+CMGR
Reference
GSM 07.05
Note
The AT^SMGR command is a specific Siemens command with the same syn-
tax as “AT+CMGR Read SMS message”. The only difference is that the SMS
Message, which has REC_UNREAD status, is not overwritten to REC_READ.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 204 of 256 15.07.2002
8.18 AT^SM20 Set M20 Compatibility
Test command
AT^SM20=?
Response
OK
Read command
AT^SM20?
Response
^SM20: <n>,<m>
OK
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT^SM20=<n>
Response
M20 is an earlier, widely used SIEMENS GSM engine. The AT^SM20 com-
mand controls the behaviour of the ATD and AT+CMGW commands as de-
scribed below. Please note that the AT^SM20 command has no effect on any
other features and is not intended to adjust other differences between M20 and
MC35.
OK
Parameters
<n> Execution of the ATD command during voice calls
0 Compatible to x35 mobiles.
If this mode is active, TA returns OK when dialling was
completed.
1 Compatible to M20.
If the M20 mode is active, TA returns OK once the call is
successfully set up.
Issuing any command before TA returns OK will cancel the
call setup.
<m> Execution of AT+CMGW command (writing SMS to memory)
0 Compatible to x35 mobiles.
If this mode is active, TA returns +CMS ERROR: <err>
when writing of SMS fails. See Chapter 9.1.3 for a list of
result codes.
1 Compatible to M20.
If the M20 mode is active, TA returns OK, no matter whether
or not AT+CMGW was successfully executed.
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 205 of 256 15.07.2002
8.19 AT^SNFA Set or query microphone attenuation
Test command
AT^SNFA=?
Response
^SNFA: (list of supported <atten>s)
Parameter
See read command
Read command
AT^SNFA?
Response
TA returns the current attenuation value on the microphone path for the current
audio device (selected with AT^SNFS, see section 8.26).
^SNFA: <atten> OK
<atten> integer type value
0 (0x0) – 65535 (0xFFFF)
attenuation = 20 log(<atten>/32767)
0 => microphone is muted
32767 => no attenuation on the microphone path
values greater than 32767 are not used
Write command
AT^SNFA=
<atten>
TA controls the large-scale attenuation on the microphone path for the current au-
dio device (selected with AT^SNFS, see 8.26) with the following restrictions:
· It is not allowed for audio device 1
· As long as the microphone is muted, the write command is temporarily dis-
abled
· Setting of value 0 is not allowed (use AT^SNFM=0 for this; see section 8.22).
· For values greater than 32767, 32767 will be used
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See read command
Reference
Note
· The command is provided for compatibility with M20 and is an alternative to
AT^SNFI (see Chapter 8.21) The parameter <inCalibrate> of AT+SNFI is iden-
tical with <atten> of AT^SNFA.
· To make the changes persistent use AT^SNFW (see Chapter 8.28).
· Command does not require a PIN.
Examples ^SYSSTART
at^snfa=?
^SNFA: (0-65535)
OK
at^snfa?
^SNFA: 32767
OK
at^snfs=4
OK
at^snfa=1
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 206 of 256 15.07.2002
OK
at^snfa?
^SNFA: 1
OK
at^snfi?
^SNFI: 5,1
OK
at^snfi=5,45
OK
at^snfa?
^SNFA: 45
OK
8.20 AT^SNFD Set audio parameters to manufacturer default values
Execute command
AT^SNFD
TA resets the parameters currently selected in audio modes 2 – 6 to their factory
values.
The restored values are: <inBbcGain>, <inCalibrate>, <outBbcGain>, <outCali-
brate[0 to 4]>, <sideTone>.
<outStep> is not be reset to its default. Instead, the current value will be retained
when the ME is powered down with AT^SMSO or restarted with AT+CFUN=1,1.
Response
OK
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 207 of 256 15.07.2002
8.21 AT^SNFI Set microphone path parameters
Test command
AT^SNFI=?
Response
^SNFI: (list of supported <inBbcGain>s), (list of supported <inCali-
brate>s) OK
Parameters
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFI?
Response
^SNFI: < inBbcGain >, <inCalibrate> OK
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFI=<inBbcGain>,
<inCalibrate>
Response
TA sets microphone path amplifying.
OK
Parameters
<inBbcGain> Setting for ADC gain Amplifier 0 - 7 (0=0dB, 7=42dB,
8 steps of 6 dB)
<inCalibrate> Multiplication factor 0 – 32767 for input samples at-
tenuation=20*log (inCalibrate/32767)
Reference
Siemens
Note
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· The range of <inCalibrate> is up to 65535 but will be suppressed to
32767. Values above <inCalibrate> = 65535 will cause a failure.
· Changed values need to be stored with AT^SNFW for use after re-
start.
· Attention! When you adjust the audio parameters avoid exceeding the
maximum allowed level. Bear in mind that exposure to excessive lev-
els of noise can cause physical damage to users!
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 208 of 256 15.07.2002
8.22 AT^SNFM Mute microphone
Test command
AT^SNFM=?
Response
^SNFM: (list of supported <mute>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFM?
Response
^SNFM: <mute> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFM=<mute>
Response
TA switches on/off the microphone
OK
Parameter
<mute> 0 Mute microphone
1 Microphone on
Reference
Siemens
Note
This command can be used in all audio modes (1 to 6) and during a
voice call only.
Users should be aware that when they switch back and forth between dif-
ferent audio modes (for example handsfree on/off) the value of <mute>
does not change. This means that the status of mute operaton is retained
until explicitly changed.
As alternative, you can use the AT+CMUT command described in Chap-
ter 4.27
8.23 Audio programming model
The following figure illustrates how the signal path can be adjusted with the AT command parameters
described in the Chapters 8.19 to 8.28.
A
D
A
D
-¥...0dB
speechcoder
(0dB; -6db,
-12dB; -18dB)
+0..42dB in
6dB-ste
p
s
1k
1k
1k
1k
2,65V
10uF
6,8R
6,8R
+
sideTone
A
T parameters
outCalibrate[n]
n = 0...4
inCalibrate
inBbcGain
outBbcGain
speechdecoder
Figure 1: AT audio programming model
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 209 of 256 15.07.2002
8.24 AT^SNFO Set audio output (= loudspeaker path) parameter
Test command
AT^SNFO=?
Response
^SNFO: (list of supported <outBbc Gain>), (list of supported <outCali-
brate[0...4] >), (list of supported <outStep>), (list of supported <sideTone>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFO?
Response
^SNFO: <outBbcGain>, <outCalibrate[0]>,...<outCalibrate[4]>, <outStep>,
<sideTone>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFO=<out-
BbcGain>,<out-
Cali-
brate[0]>,...<outCali
brate[4]>,<out-
Step>,<sideTone>
Set TA's loudspeaker path parameters.
Response
<outBbcGain> <outCalibrate[0]>...<outCalibrate[4]> <(outStep)> <sideTone>
OK
Parameters
<outBbcGain> Setting of DAC gain amplifier attenuation 0 – 3 (0=0 dB,
3=-18 dB, 4 steps of 6 dB)
<outCalibrate[0]> ... <outCalibrate[4]>
Multiplication factor 0 – 32767 for output samples
Attenuation = 20 * log (outCalibrate[n]/32767)
<outStep> Volume steps 0 – 4, each defined with <outCalibrate[n]>
<sideTone> Multiplication factor 0 – 32767 determining how much of
the original microphone signal is added to the earpiece
signal.
Side Tone Gain/dB = 20 * log (sideTone/32767)
Reference
Siemens
Note
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· <outCalibrate> specifies the amount of volume of each <outStep>. The
range of <outCalibrate> is up to 65535, but will be suppressed to 32767. A
value above <outCalibrate> = 65535 will cause an error.
· Any change to <outStep> takes effect in audio modes 2 to 6. That is, when
you change <outStep> and then select another mode with AT^SNFS, the
same step will be applied. Nevertheless, the sound quality and the amount
of volume are not necessarily the same, since all remaining audio parame-
ters can use different values in either mode.
Audio mode 1 is fixed to <outStep>=4.
· The value of <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered
down with AT^SMSO or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1. Any other parameters
changed with AT^SNFO need to be saved with AT^SNFW for use after
restart.
· CAUTION! When you adjust audio parameters avoid exceeding the maxi-
mum allowed level. Bear in mind that exposure to excessive levels of noise
can cause physical damage to users!
· <outStep> can also be selected with AT^SNFV (see Chapter 8.27 and
AT+CLVL (see Chapter 4.24).
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 210 of 256 15.07.2002
8.25 AT^SNFPT Call progress tones
Test command
AT^SNFPT =?
Response
^SNFPT: (list of supported <pt>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFPT?
Response
^SNFPT: <pt> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFPT=
<pt>
The write command controls the Call Progress Tones generated at the beginning
of a mobile originated call setup.
Response
OK
Parameter
<pt>: 0 Call Progress Tones off
1 Call Progress Tones on (audible tones shortly heard on the
phone when ME starts to set up a call).
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
value 1 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SNFPT to the user de-
fined profile.
Reference
Siemens
Note
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 211 of 256 15.07.2002
8.26 AT^SNFS Select audio hardware set
Test command
AT^SNFS=?
Response
^SNFS: (list of supported <audMode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFS?
Response
^SNFS: <audMode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFS=
<audMode>
The write command serves to set the audio mode required for the connected
equipment. The selected audio mode is saved volatile and needs to be restored
manually, if the GSM engine was powered down. Also, there is no way to store the
audio mode to the user defined profile.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+ CME ERROR: <error>
Parameters
<audMode> 1 Audio mode 1: Standard mode optimized for the default handset,
that can be connected to the analog interface 1 (see your
"Hardware Interface Description" for information on this hand-
set.) To adjust the volume use the knob of the default handset.
In audio mode 4 and 5, this handset can be used with user de-
fined parameters.
Note: The default parameters are determined for type approval
and are not adjustable with AT commands.
2 Audio mode 2: Customer specific mode for a basic handsfree
device (Siemens Car Kit Portable) connected to the analog inter-
face 2.
3 Audio mode 3: Customer specific mode for a mono-headset that
connects to the analog interface 2.
4 Audio mode 4: Customer specific mode for a user handset that
connects to the analog interface 1.
5 Audio mode 5: Customer specific mode intended for the analog
interface 1.
6 Audio mode 6: Customer specific mode intended for the analog
interface 2.
In modes 2 – 6, audio parameters can be adjusted with AT commands.
Reference
Siemens
Note
The write command can be used during a voice call to switch back and forth bet-
ween different modes. This allows the user, for example, to switch handsfree opera-
tion on and off.
Users should be aware that <outStep> is a global setting, i.e. when selecting an-
other audio mode the value of <outStep> does not change. This is also true for mute
operation which can be set with AT^SNFM or AT+CMUT: If the microphone is
muted and the user changes to another audio mode then the microphone remains
muted until explicitly changed. Exception: In audio mode 1 <outStep>=4 is fix.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 212 of 256 15.07.2002
8.27 AT^SNFV Set loudspeaker volume
Test command
AT^SNFV=?
Response
^SNFV: (list of supported <outStep>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFV?
Response
^SNFV: <outStep>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFV=<out
Step>
Response
TA sets the volume of the loudspeaker to the value <outCalibrate> addressed by
<outStep>.
OK
Parameter
<outStep> Volume steps 0 to 4. The actual volume of each step is defined by
the parameter <outCalibrate[n]> which can be set with AT^SNFO.
Reference
Siemens
Note
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6!
· Any change to <outStep> takes effect in audio modes 2 to 6. That is, when you
change <outStep> and then select another mode with AT^SNFS, the same step
will be applied. Nevertheless, the actual volume can be quite different, depend-
ing on the values of <outCalibrate[n]> set in each mode.
The only exception is audio mode 1 which is fixed to <outStep>=4.
· <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered down with AT^SMSO
or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1.
· <outStep> can also be selected with AT^SNFO (Chapter 8.24) and AT+CLVL
(Chapter 4.24).
8.28 AT^SNFW Write audio setting in non-volatile store
Test command
AT^SNFW=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^SNFW
TA writes the parameters currently selected in audio modes 2 – 6 to the non-
volatile store.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+ CME ERROR: <error>
<error> memory failure Flash write error
Reference
Siemens
Note
· Execute command works only in audio mode 2 to 6.
· Saved parameters: <inBbcGain>, <inCalibrate>, <outBbcGain>, <outCali-
brate[0]> ... <outCalibrate[4]>, <side Tone>
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 213 of 256 15.07.2002
8.29 AT^SPBC Search the first entry in the sorted telephone book
Test command
AT^SPBC=?
Response
^SPBC: (list of sorted telephone books supported <mem>s)
See AT+CPBS/AT^SPBS
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
AT^SPBC=<char>
Parameter
<char> First letter of searched entry
<index> Index in the sorted telephone book (access via AT^SPBG)
Response
^SPBC: <index>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Siemens
Note
There is no difference between small and capital letters.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 214 of 256 15.07.2002
8.30 AT^SPBG Read entry from active telephone book via sorted index
This command sorts the active phonebook records by name, in alphabetical order. Please note that
the alphabetical order is assigned an index of its own which is not identical with the location num-
bers used in the various phonebooks.
CAUTION: The AT^SBPG command is intended for reading only. For example, it helps you find en-
tries starting with matching characters. However, do not use the listed index numbers to dial out or
modify entries.
Response
^SPBG: (list of used <index>s), <nlength>, <tlength>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Test command
AT^SPBG=?
Parameter
<index> Total number of entries stored in the active phonebook; displayed as
a range of serial numbers (1 – n).
<nlength> Max. length of phone number
<tlength> Max. length of the text associated with the phone number
Response
^SPBG: <index1>, <number>, <type>, <text>[<CR><CL>
^SPBG: .....
^SPBG: <index2>, <number>, <type>, <text> ]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Execute command
AT^SPBG=
<index1>
[, <index2>]
Parameter
<index1> Serial number assigned to the position in the alphabetical list where
reading of entries starts
<index2> Serial number assigned to the position in the alphabetical list where
reading of entries ends
<number> Phone number
<type> Type of phone number
<text> Text associated with phone number
Reference
Siemens
Note
The AT^SPBG feature is able to sort by the first 6 matching characters only. All
the following characters will be ignored.
Example 1. First, run the Test command to find out the range of phonebook entries stored
in the active phonebook:
AT^SPBG=?
TA returns the number of entries in the format: ^SPBG: (1-33),20,17 where 33
is the total number of entries.
2. Now, run the Execute command to display the phonebook entries by alpha-
betical order. It is recommended to enter the full range to obtain best results.
AT^SPBG=1,33 TA returns phonebook entries by alphabetical order:
^SPBG: 1,"+999999",145,"Arthur"
^SPBG: 2,"+777777",145,"Bill"
^SPBG: 3,"+888888",145,"Charlie" .........
The numbers at the beginning of each line are not the memory locations in the
phonebook, but only serial numbers assigned to the alphabetical list.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 215 of 256 15.07.2002
8.31 AT^SPBS Steps the selected phonebook alphabetically
This command can be used to flick through the active phonebook records in alphabetical order by
name.
CAUTION: The AT^SBPS command is intended for reading only. For example, it helps you find en-
tries starting with matching characters. However, do not use the listed index numbers to dial out or
modify entries.
Test command
AT^SPBS=?
Response
^SPBS: (list of supported <value>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SPBS=
<value>
Parameter
<value> 1 to make a step downward in the alphabetically sorted phonebook
2 to make a step upward in the alphabetically sorted phonebook
Response
If <value>=1
TA steps down one entry.
^SPBS: <index2>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>
^SPBS: <index3>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>
^SPBS: <index4>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>,<CR,LF>
OK
If <value>=2 (after <value>=1)
TA steps up one entry.
^SPBS: <index1>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>
^SPBS: <index2>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>
^SPBS: <index3>,<number>,<type>,<text> <CR,LF>,<CR,LF>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
The response parameters are explained in the specification of the “AT^SPBG”
command.
Reference
Siemens
Note
This command can be used for the ME, SM and FD phonebook.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 216 of 256 15.07.2002
8.32 AT^SPIC Display PIN counter
Test command
AT^SPIC=?
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
AT^SPIC
TA returns the number of attempts still available for entering a required password,
e.g. the PIN, PUK, PH-SIM PUK etc. To check whether or not you need to enter a
password use the “AT+CPIN?” command.
Response
^SPIC: <counter> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<counter> Number of attempts counted down after each failure.
Reference
Siemens
Note
· When entering the SIM PIN or PUK you have a maximum of three attempts to
enter each number.
· For passwords associated to the phone lock ("PS" lock set by client or factory)
or other factory set locks, such as "PF", "PN", "PU", "PP", "PC" the number of
attempts is subject to a timing algorithm explained in Chapter 4.35.1. If these
passwords are incorrectly entered the counter first returns 3, 2 and 1 remaining
attempt(s), but then gives the total number of attempts which amounts to 63
(see example below).
· See also Chapters 4.21, 4.35 4.36, 4.38, 8.13 for further information on locks
and passwords.
Example Though a mobile is locked to a specific SIM card (phone lock), the client attempts
to operate it with another SIM card. The client correctly enters the SIM PIN of the
SIM card currently inserted, but then fails to give the "PS" lock password (PH-SIM
PUK):
at+cpin=9999
OK
at+cpin?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN ME is waiting for the phone lock password
OK
at^spic
^SPIC: 3
OK
at+cpin=4711
+CME ERROR: PH-SIM PIN required
at+cpin=4712
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 217 of 256 15.07.2002
at^spic
^SPIC: 1
OK
at+cpin=4713
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 63
OK
at+cpin=4714
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 63
8.33 AT^SPLM Read the PLMN list
Test command
AT^SPLM=?
Response
OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
AT^SPLM
Response
TA returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <nu-
mericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory is re-
turned.
^SPLM: numeric <numeric1>,long alphanumeric <alpha1><CR><LF>
^SPLM:.....OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<numericn> string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identifica-
tion number
<alphan> string type; operator in long alphanumeric format; can contain up to
16 characters
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also GSM 07.07: +COPN, +COPS
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 218 of 256 15.07.2002
8.34 AT^SPLR Read entry from the preferred operators list
Test command
AT^SPLR=?
Response
TA returns the whole index range supported by the SIM.
^SPLR: (list of supported <index>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SPLR=
<index1>[,
<index2>]
Response
TA returns used entries from the SIM list of preferred operators with <index> be-
tween <index1> and <index2>. If <index2> is not given, only entry with <index1> is
returned.
^SPLR: <index1>, <oper>
^SPLR: .....
^SPLR: <index2>, <oper> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<index1> location number to read from
<index2> location number to read to
<oper> string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identification
number
Reference
Siemens
Note
GSM 07.07: AT+CPOL
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 219 of 256 15.07.2002
8.35 AT^SPLW Write an entry to the preferred operators list
Test command
AT^SPLW=?
Response
TA returns the whole index range supported by the SIM.
^SPLW: (list of supported <index>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SPLW=
<index>
[,<oper>]
Parameter
TA writes an entry to the SIM list of preferred operators at location number <in-
dex>. If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, the entry is deleted. If <oper> is
given but <index> is left out, <oper> is inserted in the next free location.
<index> location number
<oper> string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identification
number
Note: <oper> is a 5 digit number, 3 digits country code and 2 digits for
the Network provider.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also GSM 07.07: AT+CPOL
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 220 of 256 15.07.2002
8.36 AT^SPWD Change password for a lock
Test command
AT^SPWD=?
Response
^SPWD: (list of supported (<fac>, <pwdlength>)s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> “P2” PIN2
otherwise see write command without “FD”
<pwdlength> integer, max. length of password
Write command
AT^SPWD =
<fac>, <oldp-
wd>,<newpwd>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security passwords
“SC” SIM card (PIN)
“P2” PIN 2
“PS” Phone locked to SIM (device code)
Factory set locks
“PF” lock Phone to the very first SIM card
“PN” Network Personalisation
“PU” Network subset Personalisation
“PP” Service Provider Personalisation
“PC” Corporate Personalisation
Supplementary Service: Call barring
“AO” BAOC ( Bar All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” BOIC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
“AI” BAIC ( Bar All Incoming Calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam ( Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the
home country)
“AB” All Barring services
“AG” All outGoing barring services
“AC” All inComing barring services
Note: All call barring types have usually the same ME <password> to
lock and unlock. The default <password> is supplied from the network
provider. TA sets a new password for the facility lock function.
<oldpwd> Password specified for the facility from the user interface or with
command.
Can be ignored if no old password was allocated to the facility. Take
into account that a password may have already been set by factory,
or that the service is sub
j
ect to a
p
assword issued b
y
the
p
rovider.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 221 of 256 15.07.2002
See notes above or contact provider.
if <fac> = “SC” then PIN
if <fac> = “AO”...”AC” (barring) then network password (if needed)
if <fac> = “P2” then PIN2
<newpwd> new password
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
Siemens
Note
See also specification of AT+ CPWD in GSM 07.07 and further details in Chapter
4.38.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 222 of 256 15.07.2002
8.37 AT^SRTC Select, query, test ring tone parameters
Test command
AT^SRTC=?
Response
^SRTC: (list of supported <type>s), (list of supported <vol>s) OK
Read command
AT^SRTC?
Response
^SRTC: <type>, <vol>, <stat> OK
Parameters
<type> Type of ringing tone. 7 different tones and melodies can be
selected:
1 – 7 (factory setting is <type>=3)
<vol> Volume of ringing tone. Varies from low to high.
0 Mute (factory setting)
1 Very low (initial setting after firmware update)
2 Identical with 1
3 Low
4 Identical with 3
5 Middle
6 Identical with 5
7 High
<stat> Status of test ringing. Indicates whether or not a melody is
currently being played back for testing.
0 Playback is off.
1 Playback is on.
The Read command can be used while test playback is off or on. In
the latter case, see Execute command for details.
Write command
AT^SRTC=[<type>][,<vol>]
Response
^SRTC: <type>, <vol>OK
Parameters
See Read command
The Write command selects the type and volume of ringing tones. It
can be used while test playback is off or on. In the latter case, see
Execute command for details.
The selected type and volume apply to all audio modes. Also they are
saved in the non-volatile Flash memory and, thus, are retained after
Power Down.
Before first using ringing tones:
We have chosen to let you decide your own preferences when you
start using ringing tones. Therefore, factory setting is AT^SRTC=3,0,0
(ringing tones are muted). To activate ringing tones for the very first
time, first enter the Write command and simply change the volume.
After a firmware update the volume will be reset to <vol>=1. The
<type> selected before the firmware update will be preserved.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 223 of 256 15.07.2002
Execute Command
AT^SRTC
The Execute command is intended for testing. It starts to play a mel-
ody from the audio output currently selected with the AT^SNFS com-
mand.
Response
OK
To stop the test use AT^SRTC again. During test playback, you can
enter the Write command to select another melody and adjust the
volume. Also, you can enter the Read command to check the type
and volume of the current ringing tone, and to view the status of play-
back (on / off).
The test ringing signal cannot be activated when an MTC is ringing
(ERROR).
If an MTC arrives during test playback, test ringing stops and “normal“
ringing is activated (RING).
Selecting <vol>=0 during the test, immediately stops playback. After
this, ringing tones will be muted until you change <vol> using the
Write command.
Reference
SIEMENS
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 224 of 256 15.07.2002
8.38 AT^SSCONF SMS Configuration
Test command
AT^SSCONF
=?
Response
^SSCONF: (list of supported <ra>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SSCONF?
Response
^SSCONF: <ra> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SSCONF=
<ra>
The write command serves to control the presentation of the recipient address pa-
rameters <ra> and <tora>.
Response
OK
Parameter
<ra>: display recipient address
0 the mobile station shall not display the parameter <ra> and <tora>.
1 the mobile station shall display the parameter <ra> and <tora>.
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
value 0 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SSCONF to the user
defined profile.
Reference
Siemens
Note
The parameters <ra> and <tora> appear in the result codes of the AT commands
AT+CMGL, AT^SMGL, AT+CMGR, AT^SMGR and the unsolicited result code
+CDS.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 225 of 256 15.07.2002
8.39 AT^SSDA Set Display Availability
Use the AT^SSDA command to specify whether your MC35 product is designed to provide a display.
If there is one available, AT^SSDA enables or disables the mobile station to present incoming
Class 0 short messages directly on the display. The command is not required for other short mes-
sage Classes.
Test command
AT^SSDA =?
Response
^SSDA: (list of supported <da>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^ SSDA?
Response
^SSDA: <da> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SSDA=
<da>
Response
OK
Parameter
<da>: display availability
0 the mobile station is not capable of displaying short messages
1 the mobile station is capable of displaying short messages
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
value 0 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SSDA to the user de-
fined profile.
Reference
Siemens
Note
If a mobile station is able to display short messages, class 0 messages can be
displayed immediately. If the mobile station has no display, class 0 messages
shall be treated as though there was no message class.
Refer to GSM 03.38.
The setting of <da> influences the behaviour of the <mt> parameter in the com-
mand AT+CNMI. This is the only effect of this command. If <da>=1 and <mt>=1 or
3, then Class 0 short messages will be treated as if <da>=0 and <mt>=2. For de-
tails on AT+CNMI refer to Chapter 5.10.
Multiplex protocol:
If using <da>=1 and <mt>=1 on one instance, all other instances have to use
<mt>=0.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 226 of 256 15.07.2002
8.40 AT^SSYNC Configure SYNC Pin
The ^SSYNC command serves to configure the SYNC pin in the ZIF connector of the GSM engine.
Please note that the pin may be assigned different functions, depending on the design of the host
application. MC35 Terminal supports only <mode>=1.
For detailed information on the SYNC pin of the MC35 module refer to [1]. Before changing the
mode of the SYNC pin, carefully read the technical specifications.
Test command
AT^SSYNC=?
Response
^SSYNC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter:
See write command
Read command
AT^SSYNC?
Response
+SSYNC: <mode> OK
Parameter:
See write command
Write command
AT^SSYNC=
<mode>
Response
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 MC35 module: Enables the SYNC pin to indicate growing power
consumption during a transmit burst. You can make use of the sig-
nal generated by the SYNC pin, if power consumption is your con-
cern. To do so, ensure that your application is capable of process-
ing the signal. Your platform design must be such that the incoming
signal causes other components to draw less current. In short, this
allows your application to accomodate current drain and thus, sup-
ply sufficient current to the GSM engine if required.
MC35 Terminal: not applicable (do not select mode 0).
1 Enables the SYNC pin to control a status LED. On the MC35 Ter-
minal, this is the LED placed on the front panel. If you use the
MC35 module, the SYNC pin can control an LED installed in your
application.
The LED functions described in Table 12 are applicable both to the
module and the terminal.
Note: Mode 1 is the default mode for the MC35 Terminal.
Note The SYNC pin mode is stored to the non-volatile Flash memory, and thus retained
after Power Down.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 227 of 256 15.07.2002
Table 12: Operating modes of the ME indicated by status LED (if <mode> = 1):
LED mode Function
Off MC35 module: ME is off or running in SLEEP, Alarm or
Charge-only mode.
MC35 Terminal: ME is off or in SLEEP mode.
600 ms On / 600ms Off No SIM card inserted or no PIN entered, or network
search in progress, or ongoing user authentication, or
network login in progress.
75 ms On / 3 s Off Logged to network (monitoring control channels and user
interactions). No call in progress.
75 ms on / 75 ms Off / 75 ms On / 3 s Off One or more GPRS contexts activated.
Flashing Indicates GPRS data transfer: When a GPRS transfer is in
progress, the LED goes on within 1 second after data
packets were exchanged. Flash duration is approximately
0.5 s.
On Depending on type of call:
Voice call: Connected to remote party.
Data call: Connected to remote party or exchange of pa-
rameters while setting up or disconnecting a call.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 228 of 256 15.07.2002
8.41 AT^STCD Display Total Call Duration
Test command
AT^STCD=?
Response
OK
Execute command
AT^STCD
Response
TA returns total call duration (accumulated duration of all calls)
^STCD: <time> OK
Parameter
<time> string type value; format is "hh:mm:ss", where characters indicate
hours, minutes, seconds; E.g. 22:10:00 “22:10:00"
max value is 9999:59:59
Reference
Siemens
Note
The Total Call Duration will not be reset by power off or other means.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 229 of 256 15.07.2002
9 APPENDIX
9.1 Summary of ERRORS and Messages
The final result codes +CME ERROR: <err> and +CMS ERROR: <err> indicate errors related to mo-
bile equipment or network. The effect is similar to an ERROR result code.
A final result error code terminates the execution of the command and prevents the execution of all
remaining commands that may follow on the same command line. If so, neither ERROR nor OK result
code are returned. A 30 seconds timeout causes ERROR to be returned when the input of a command
is not complete.
The format of <err> can be either numeric or verbose. This is set with the AT+CMEE command (see
Chapter 4.25).
9.1.1 Summary of CME ERRORS related to GSM 07.07
Code of <err> Meaning
0 phone failure
1 no connection to phone
2 phone-adapter link reserved
3 Operation not allowed
4 Operation not supported
5 PH-SIM PIN required
6 PH-FSIM PIN required
7 PH-FSIM PUK required
10 SIM not inserted
11 SIM PIN required
12 SIM PUK required
13 SIM failure
14 SIM busy
15 SIM wrong
16 Incorrect password
17 SIM PIN2 required
18 SIM PUK2 required
20 Memory full
21 invalid index
22 not found
23 Memory failure
24 text string too long
25 invalid characters in text string
26 dial string too long
27 invalid characters in dial string
30 no network service
31 Network timeout
32 Network not allowed emergency calls only
40 Network personalization PIN required
41 Network personalization PUK required
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 230 of 256 15.07.2002
Code of <err> Meaning
42 Network subset personalization PIN required
43 Network subset personalization PUK required
44 service provider personalization PIN required
45 service provider personalization PUK required
46 Corporate personalization PIN required
47 Corporate personalization PUK required
48
PH-SIM PUK required
(PH-SIM PUK may also be referred to as Master Phone Code. For further details
see Chapters 4.21.2 and 4.35.1)
100 Unknown
256 Operation temporarily not allowed
257 call barred
258 phone is busy
259 user abort
260 invalid dial string
261 ss not executed
262 SIM blocked
Note: Values below 256 are reserved.
9.1.2 Summary of GPRS-related CME ERRORS
Code of <err> Meaning
103 Illegal MS
106 Illegal ME
107 GPRS services not allowed
111 PLMN not allowed
112 Location area not allowed
113 Roaming not allowed in this location area
132 service option not supported
133 requested service option not subscribed
134 service option temporarily out of order
148 unspecified GPRS error
149 PDP authentication failure
150 invalid mobile class
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 231 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.3 Summary of CMS ERRORS related to GSM 07.05
Code of <err> Meaning
1 Unassigned (unallocated) number
8 Operator determined barring
10 Call barred
21 Short message transfer rejected
27 Destination out of service
28 Unidentified subscriber
29 Facility rejected
30 Unknown subscriber
38 Network out of order
41 Temporary failure
42 Congestion
47 Resources unavailable, unspecified
50 Requested facility not subscribed
69 Requested facility not implemented
81 Invalid short message transfer reference value
95 Invalid message, unspecified
96 Invalid mandatory information
97 Message type non-existent or not implemented
98 Message not compatible with short message protocol state
99 Information element non-existent or not implemented
111 Protocol error, unspecified
127 Interworking, unspecified
128 Telematic interworking not supported
129 Short message Type 0 not supported
130 Cannot replace short message
143 Unspecified TP-PID error
144 Data coding scheme (alphabet) not supported
145 Message class not supported
159 Unspecified TP-DCS error
160 Command cannot be actioned
161 Command unsupported
175 Unspecified TP-Command error
176 TPDU not supported
192 SC busy
193 No SC subscription
194 SC system failure
195 Invalid SME address
196 Destination SME barred
197 SM Rejected-Duplicate SM
198 TP-VPF not supported
199 TP-VP not supported
208 D0 SIM SMS storage full
209 No SMS storage capability in SIM
210 Error in MS
211 Memory Capacity Exceeded
212 SIM Application Toolkit Busy
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 232 of 256 15.07.2002
Code of <err> Meaning
213 SIM data download error
255 Unspecified error cause
300 ME failure
301 SMS service of ME reserved
302 Operation not allowed
303 Operation not supported
304 Invalid PDU mode parameter
305 Invalid text mode parameter
310 SIM not inserted
311 SIM PIN required
312 PH-SIM PIN required
313 SIM failure
314 SIM busy
315 SIM wrong
316 SIM PUK required
317 SIM PIN2 required
318 SIM PUK2 required
320 Memory failure
321 Invalid memory index
322 Memory full
330 SMSC address unknown
331 no network service
332 Network timeout
340 NO +CNMA ACK EXPECTED
500 Unknown error
512 User abort
513 unable to store
514 invalid status
515 invalid character in address string
516 invalid length
517 invalid character in pdu
518 invalid parameter
519 invalid length or character
520 invalid character in text
521 timer expired
Note:
If you attempt to use SMS related AT commands before inserting a SIM card or entering the SIM PIN,
the resulting errors will be delivered in the form of CME errors instead of CMS errors.
This is a normal behaviour since the GSM 07.05 based CMS errors are mapped to GSM 07.07 based
CME errors if SIM PIN authentication has not been done.
Example 1
The application tries to send a short message though the SIM card is not present:
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 233 of 256 15.07.2002
AT+CMGS=123456
+CME ERROR: 10 // Equivalent to +CMS ERROR: 310
Example 2
The application tries to send a short message while the SIM card is present, but
PIN authentication has not yet been done.
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGS=123456
+CME ERROR: 11 // Equivalent to +CMS ERROR: 311
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 234 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.4 Summary of Unsolicited Result Codes (URC)
A URC is a report message sent from the ME to the TE. An unsolicited result code can either be deliv-
ered automatically when an event occurs or as a result of a query the ME received before. However, a
URC is not issued as a direct response to an executed AT command.
Typical URCs may be information about incoming calls, received SMS, changing temperature, status
of the battery etc. A summary of URCs is listed in Table 13 and Table 14.
When sending a URC the ME activates its Ring Line (Logic "1"), i.e. the line goes active low for 1 sec-
ond.
If an event that delivers a URC coincides with the execution of an AT command, the URC will be out-
put after command execution has completed.
For each of these messages, you can configure the ME whether or not to send an unsolicited result
code. Remember that the presentation mode of URCs will be reset to the default values
· when you power down the GSM engine, e.g. with AT^SMSO or when disconnecting power supply,
· when you reset the engine with AT+CFUN=1,1
· when you restore the factory settings with AT&F.
To take advantage of the messages, you need to activate the desired URC every time you reboot the
GSM engine or have the parameters included in the user profile saved with AT&W. If you do so, take
into account that the presentation mode of some URCs cannot be saved to the user profile, for exam-
ple ^SBC, ^SCTM, +CSSI and +CSSU.
The URCs SYSSTART, SYSSTART CHARGE-ONLY MODE and SYSSTART ALARM MODE are not
user definable. This is also true for the Fax Class 2 URCS listed in Table 14.
Table 13: Summary of URCs
Message Meaning How to activate
URC
RING Incoming calls Not defined by user
+CCCM: <ccm> Current call meter value AT^SACM=1
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] Registration to ME network changed AT+CREG=1 or
AT+CREG=2
+CRING: <type> Indication of an incoming call AT+CRC=1
+CLIP: <number>, <type> Telephone number of caller AT+CLIP=1
+CMTI:<mem>,<index> Indication of a new short message (text
and PDU mode)
AT+CNMI=1,1
+CMT:,<length><CR><LF><pdu> Short message is output directly to the
TE (in PDU mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,2
+CMT:<oa>,,<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,
<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
Short message is output directly to the
TE (in text mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,2
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,
<pages><CR> <LF><data>
Cell broadcast message is output directly
to the TE (in text mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,0,2
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> Cell broadcast message is output directly
to the TE (in PDU mode)
Examples:
AT+CNMI=1,0,2
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],
<scts>,<dt>, <st>
SMS status report routed directly to TE
(in PDU mode)
SMS status report routed directly to TE
(in text mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,0,0,1
+CDSI: <mem>,<index> SMS status report routed ME/TA. Can be
queried from the memory with location
index number (text and PDU mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,0,0,2
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 235 of 256 15.07.2002
Message Meaning How to activate
URC
+CSSI: <code1>
+CSSU: <code2>
Supplementary service intermedi-
ate/unsolicited result code
AT+CSSN=1,1
^SMGO: <mode> SMS overflow indicator AT^SMGO=1
^SCKS: <m> Indicates whether card has been re-
moved or inserted
AT^SCKS=1
^SCTM_A: <m>
^SCTM_B: <m>
Battery (A) or board (B) is close to or be-
yond critical temperature limit. URC is is-
sued repeatedly. If <m>=2 or <m>-2, ME
switches off.
AT^SCTM=1
^SBC: Undervoltage Undervoltage of battery detected. ME will
be switched off within a minute.
AT^SBC=<current>
^SYSSTART Indicates that ME has successfully been
started.
Note that this URC will not appear if
autobauding is enabled.
Not defined by user
^SYSSTART CHARGE-ONLY
MODE
Only applicable to battery operated MEs:
URC indicates that ME has entered the
Charge-only mode.
Charge-only mode allows charging while
ME is detached from network. Limited
number of AT commands is accessible.
Mode can be launched by connecting the
battery charger to the POWER pins of
the ZIF connector, before or after power-
ing down ME with AT^SMSO.
Note that this URC will not appear if
autobauding is enabled.
Not defined by user
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
or, if individual text available:
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: <text>
Indicates that ME has entered Alarm
mode.
RTC alert set with the AT+CALA com-
mand. Executed when ME has been
powered down. Causes ME to wake up
from Power Down mode. Preventing ME
from unintentionally registering to the
network, Alarm mode allows limited op-
eration. Limited number of AT com-
mands is accessible. Do not confuse
with wake-up or reminder call.
Note that this URC will not appear if
autobauding is enabled.
Enabled when you
configure Alarm
mode
+CALA: <text> Wake-up or reminder call set with
AT+CALA command. Executed while ME
is in normal operation. Do not confuse
with Alarm mode.
Enabled when you
set wake-up call
+CIEV: <text> Reports changes from indicators listed in
the AT+CIND command specification.
AT+CMER=2,0,0,2
AT+CMER=3,0,0,2
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 236 of 256 15.07.2002
Table 14: Summary of Fax Class 2 URCs defined by EIA PN-2388
Message Meaning
+FCON Indicates connection with a fax machine
+FNSF:<param> Reports non-standard setup frame
+FTSI:"<id>" Reports the remote ID, transmit station ID
+FCSI:"<id>" Reports the remote ID, called station ID
+FDCS:<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST> Reports the current session parameter
(refer to EIA PN-2388, table 3.10)
+FDIS:<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST> Reports the remote station capabilities
(refer to EIA PN-2388, table 3.10)
+FHNG:<stat> Reports call terminated with status
+FPTS:<stat> Reports received page status
+FET:<stat> Reports post page message
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 237 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.5 Result codes
Indication Numeric Meaning
OK 0 Command executed, no errors, Wake up after reset
CONNECT 1 Link established
RING 2 Ring detected
NO CARRIER 3 Link not established or disconnected
ERROR 4 Invalid command or command line too long
NO DIALTONE 6 No dial tone, dialling impossible, wrong mode
BUSY 7 Remote station busy
CONNECT 2400/RLP 47 Link with 2400 bps and Radio Link Protocol
CONNECT 4800/RLP 48 Link with 4800 bps and Radio Link Protocol
CONNECT 9600/RLP 49 Link with 9600 bps and Radio Link Protocol
CONNECT 14400/RLP 50 Link with 14400 bps and Radio Link Protocol
ALERTING Alerting at called phone
DIALING Mobile phone is dialing
9.1.6 Cause Location ID for the extended error report (AT+CEER)
ID Description
0 No error (default)
1 SIEMENS L2 cause
2 GSM cause for L3 Radio Resource Sublayer (GSM 04.08 annex F)
3 SIEMENS cause for L3 Radio Resource Sublayer
4 GSM cause for L3 Mobility Management (GSM 04.08 annex G)
5 SIEMENS cause for L3 Mobility Management
6 GSM cause for L3 Mobility Management via MMR-SAP (GSM 04.08 annex G)
7 SIEMENS cause for L3 Mobility Management via MMR-SAP
8 GSM cause for L3 Call Control (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.11 and annex H)
9 SIEMENS cause for L3 Call Control
11 SIEMENS cause for L3 Advice of Charge Entity
12 GSM cause for L3 SMS CP Entity
13 SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS CP Entity
14 GSM cause for L3 SMS RL Entity
15 SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS RL Entity
16 GSM cause for L3 SMS TL Entity
17 SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS TL Entity
18 SIEMENS cause for DSM Entity
21 GSM cause for L3 Call-related Supplementary Services
22 SIEMENS cause for L3 Call-related Supplementary Services
32 SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Entity
33 SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Manager
34 Network cause for Supplementary Services (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.11 and annex H)
35 Supplementary Services network error (GSM 04.80 3.6.6)
48 GSM cause for GPRS Mobility Management (GSM 04.08 annex G.6)
49 SIEMENS cause for GPRS Mobility Management
50 GSM cause for Session Management (GSM 04.08 annex I)
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 238 of 256 15.07.2002
51 SIEMENS cause for Session Management
128 Supplementary Services general problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
129 Supplementary Services invoke problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
130 Supplementary Services result problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
131 Supplementary Services error problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
241 SIEMENS cause for GPRS API
242 SIEMENS cause for Link Management
243 SIEMENS cause for Embedded Netcore (Internet Protocol Stack)
9.1.7 GSM release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 Normal event
1 Abnormal release, unspecified
2 Abnormal release, channel unacceptable
3 Abnormal release, timer expired
4 Abnormal release, no activity on the radio path
5 Pre-emptive release
8 Handover impossible, timing advance out of range
9 Channel mode unacceptable
10 Frequency not implemented
65 Call already cleared
95 Semantically incorrect message
96 Invalid mandantory information
97 Message type non-existent or not implemented
98 Message type not compatible with protocol state
100 Conditional information element error
101 No cell allocation available
111 Protocol error unspecified
9.1.8 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
1 Racchs not answered
2 Racchs rejected
3 Access class of the SIM is barred by the network provider
4 SABM failure
5 Radio link counter expiry or PerformAbnormalRelease
6 Confirm ABORT of the MM
7 Respond to DEACT_REQ
8 Loss of coverage
9 Reestablishment not possible
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 239 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.9 GSM release cause for Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
Causes related to MS identification
2 IMSI unknown in HLR
3 Illegal MS
4 IMSI unknown in VLR
5 IMEI not accepted
6 Illegal ME
Cause related to subscription options
11 PLMN not allowed
12 Location Area not allowed
13 Roaming not allowed in this location area
Causes related to PLMN specific network failures and congestion
17 Network failure
22 Congestion
Causes related to nature of request
32 Service option not supported
33 Requested service option not subscribed
34 Service option temporarily out of order
38 Call cannot be identified
Causes related to invalid messages
95 Semantically incorrect message
96 Invalid mandantory information
97 Message type non-existent or not implemented
98 Message not compatible with protocol state
99 Information element non-existent or not implemented
100 Conditional information element error
101 Messages not compatible with protocol state
111 Protocol error, unspecified
Causes related GPRS
7 GPRS services not allowed
8 GPRS services not allowed in combination with non-GPRS services
9 MS identity cannot be identified by the network
10 Implicitly detached
14 GPRS services not allowed in current PLMN
16 MSC temporarily unreachable
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 240 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.10 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
1 No SIM available
8 No MM connection
9 Authentification failure
11 MM performs detach
17 The registration failed and will be re-attempted in a short term
18 The CM connection establishment failed
19 The registration failed and will be re-attempt in a long term
20 The RR connection is released
21 The MS tries to register
22 The SPLMN is not available
23 An MTC is in progress
24 A PLMN scan is in progress
25 The MM is detached, the MS is in MS class C GPRS only
9.1.11 GSM release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 No error
Normal class
1 Unassigned (unallocated) number
3 No route to destination
6 Channel unacceptable
8 Operator determined barring
16 Normal call clearing
17 User busy
18 No user responding
19 User alerting, no answer
21 Call rejected
22 Number changed
25 Pre-emption
26 Non-selected user clearing
27 Destination out of order
28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29 Facility rejected
30 Response to STATUS ENQUIRY
31 Normal, unspecified
Resource unavailable class
34 No circuit/channel available
38 Network out of order
41 Temporary failure
42 Switching equipment congestion
43 Access information discarded
44 Requested circuit/channel not available
47 Resource unavailable, unspecified
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 241 of 256 15.07.2002
Number Description
Service or option not available class
49 Quality of service unavailable
50 Requested facility not subscribed
55 Incoming calls barred within the CUG
57 Bearer capability not authorized
58 Bearer capability presently not available
63 Service or option not available, unspecified
Service or option not implemented
65 Bearer service not implemented
68 ACM equal or greater than ACMmax
69 Requested facility not implemented
70 Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available
79 service or option not implemented, unspecified
Invalid message (e.g. parameter out of range) class
81 Invalid transaction identifier value
87 User not member of CUG
88 Incompatible destination
91 Invalid transit network selection
95 Semantically incorrect message
Protocol error (e.g. unknown message) class
96 Invalid mandantory information
97 Message type non-existant or not implemented
98 Message type not comaptible with protocol state
99 Information element non-existent or not implemented
100 Conditional information element error
101 Message not compatible with protocol
102 Recovery on timer expiry
111 Protocol error, unspecified
Interworking class
127 Interworking, unspecified
9.1.12 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
1 Call dropped
2 Service not available
3 Hold procedure not available
4 Temporary no service, previous procedure not yet finished
5 No speech service available
6 Call reestablishment procedure active
7 Mobile received a release (complete) message during a modify procedure (modify re-
ject)
8 Call clearing, because loss of radio connection, if no reestablishment is allowed (call
not active)
10 Number not included in FDN list
Notifications
300 Called party barred incoming call
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 242 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.13 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Advice of Charge (AOC) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
1 SIM data not available
2 SIM does not support AOC
3 SIM data access error
4 ACM limit almost reached ACM range overflow
5 ACM range overflow
9.1.14 GSM release cause for Supplementary Service call (AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 No error (default)
1 UnknownSubscriber
9 IllegalSubscriber
10 BearerServiceNotProvisioned
11 TeleserviceNotProvisioned
12 IllegalEquipment
13 CallBarred
15 CUGReject
16 IllegalSSOperation
17 SSErrorStatus
18 SSNotAvailable
19 SSSubscriptionViolation
20 SSIncompatibility
21 FacilityNotSupported
27 AbsentSubscriber
29 ShortTermDenial
30 LongTermDenial
34 SystemFailure
35 DataMissing
36 UnexpectedDataValue
37 PWRegistrationFailure
38 NegativePWCheck
43 NumberOfPWAttemptsViolation
71 UnknownAlphabet
72 USSDBusy
126 MaxNumsOfMPTYCallsExceeded
127 ResourcesNotAvailable
General Problem Codes
300 Unrecognized Component
301 Mistyped Component
302 Badly Structured Component
Invoke Problem Codes
303 Duplicate Invoke ID
304 Unrecognized Operation
305 Mistyped Parameter
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 243 of 256 15.07.2002
Number Description
306 Resource Limitation
307 Initiating Release
308 Unrecognized Linked ID
309 Linked Response Unexpected
310 Unexpected Linked Operation
Return Result Problem Codes
311 Unrecognize Invoke ID
312 Return Result Unexpected
313 Mistyped Parameter
Return Error Problem Codes
314 Unrecognized Invoke ID
315 Return Error Unexpected
316 Unrecognized Error
317 Unexpected Error
318 Mistyped Parameter
9.1.15 Siemens release cause for Call related Supplementary Services (CRSS)
(AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 ECT procedure failed (timer expired)
1 Call has been cleared without receiving an answer to ECT request
2 Initial conditions not fulfilled (one active, one held call)
3 Received “return error”
4 Call has been cleared without receiving an answer to CCBS request
5 Initial conditions for CCBS not fulfilled (Idle CRSS)
9.1.16 GSM release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
Causes related to nature of request
25 LLC or SNDCP failure
26 Insufficient ressources
27 Unknown or missing access point name
28 Unknown PDP address or PDP type
29 User authentification failed
30 Activation rejected by GGSN
31 Activation rejected, unspecified
32 Service option not supported
33 Requested service option not subscribed
34 Service option temporarily out of order
35 NSAPI already used
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 244 of 256 15.07.2002
Number Description
36 Regular PDP context deactivation
37 QoS not accepted
38 Network failure
39 Reactivation requested
40 Feature not supported
Causes related to invalid messages
81 Invalid transaction identifier value
95 Semantically incorrect message
96 Invalid mandantory information
97 Message type non-existant or not implemented
98 Message type not comaptible with protocol state
99 Information element non-existent or not implemented
100 Conditional information element error
101 Message not compatible with protocol
111 Protocol error, unspecified
9.1.17 SIEMENS release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER)
Number Description
3 The MS has not got any answer to the ACTIVATE PDP CONTEXT request message
sent five times to the network
4 A MT PDP context which is active or in the activation process is deactivated because
another MT PDP context with the same TI is requested by the network to be activated
5 A MT PDP context which is active or in the activation process is deactivated because
another MT PDP context with the same TI is requested by the network to be activated.
The activation request is rejected by the SM sending the cause 'insufficient resources'
to the network because the SM was not able to perform the necessary comparisons
for a static PDP address collision detection.
6 A MT PDP context which is active or in the activation process is deactivated because
another MT PDP context with the same TI is requested by the network to be activated.
As a static PDP address collision with an MO activating PDP context has been de-
tected by the SM the SM discards the activation request
7 A MT PDP context request has been indicated but could not be processed in time.
The activation request is rejected by the SM sending the cause 'insufficient resources'
to the network.
9.1.18 SIEMENS release cause for GPRS API (AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 Regular deactivation of the call
1 Action temporarily not allowed
2 Wrong connection type
3 Specified data service profile invalid
4 PDP type or address is unknown
255 Undefined
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 245 of 256 15.07.2002
9.1.19 SIEMENS release cause for Embedded Netcore (AT+CEER)
Number Description
0 Regular call deactivation
1 LCP stopped
255 Undefined
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 246 of 256 15.07.2002
9.2 Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands
The following table lists all the AT commands that are available after the PIN was entered.
AT command Required PIN
Standard V25.ter AT commands
ATA PIN 1
ATD PIN 1
ATH PIN 1
AT+ILRR PIN 1
AT+VTS PIN 1
AT commands originating from GSM 07.07
AT+CACM PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CAMM PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CAOC PIN 1
AT+CCFC PIN 1
AT+CCUG PIN 1
AT+CCWA PIN 1
AT+CEER PIN 1
AT+CGACT PIN 1
AT+CGATT PIN 1
AT+CGDATA PIN 1
AT+CGDCONT PIN 1
AT+CGQMIN PIN 1
AT+CGQREQ PIN 1
AT+CHLD PIN 1
AT+CHUP PIN 1
AT+CIMI PIN 1
AT+CLCC PIN 1
AT+CLCK PIN 1
AT+CLIP read PIN 1
AT+CLIR PIN 1
AT+CMER PIN 1
AT+CMGC PIN 1
AT+CMGD PIN 1
AT+CMGL PIN 1
AT+CMGR PIN 1
AT+CMGS PIN 1
AT+CMGW PIN 1
AT+CMSS PIN 1
AT+CNMA PIN 1
AT+CNMI PIN 1
AT+COPN PIN 1
AT+CPIN2 PIN1
AT+CPBR PIN 1
AT+CPBS PIN 1
AT+CPBW PIN 1
AT+CPMS PIN 1
AT+CPUC PIN 1, PIN 2
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 247 of 256 15.07.2002
AT command Required PIN
AT+CPWD PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CR PIN 1
AT+CRSM PIN 1
AT+CSCA PIN 1
AT+CSCB PIN 1
AT+CSDH PIN 1
AT+CSMP PIN 1
AT+CSMS PIN 1
AT+CUSD PIN 1
Siemens defined AT commands
AT^MONP PIN 1
AT^MONI PIN 1
AT^SACM PIN 1, PIN 2
AT^SCNI PIN 1
AT^SDLD PIN 1
AT^SLCD PIN 1
AT^SLCK PIN 1
AT^SMGL PIN 1
AT^SMGO PIN 1
AT^SMGR PIN 1
AT^SPBC PIN 1
AT^SPBG PIN 1
AT^SPBS PIN 1
AT^SPLM PIN 1
AT^SPLR PIN 1
AT^SPLW PIN 1
AT^SPWD PIN 1, PIN 2
AT^SSDA PIN 1
AT^STCD PIN 1
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 248 of 256 15.07.2002
9.3 AT commands available before entering the SIM PIN
The following table summarizes the AT commands you can use before the SIM PIN has been entered.
Explanation:
l AT command usable without PIN
--- not usable without PIN
n.a. AT command not available at all
AT command Test Read Write /
Execute
Note
Standard V.25ter AT commands
ATD n.a. n.a l For emergency calls only
ATE n.a. n.a l
ATI n.a. n.a l
ATO n.a. n.a l
ATQ n.a. n.a l
ATS3 n.a. l l
ATS4 n.a. l l
ATS5 n.a. l l
AT\Q n.a. n.a. l
ATSn n.a. l l
ATS18 l n.a l
ATV n.a. n.a l
ATX n.a. n.a l
ATZ n.a. n.a l
AT&C n.a. n.a l
AT&D n.a. n.a l
AT&F n.a. n.a l
AT&V n.a. n.a l
AT+IPR l l l
AT commands originating from GSM 07.07
AT+CALA l l l
AT+CBST l l l
AT+CCLK l l l
AT+CFUN l l l
AT+CGMI l n.a. l
AT+CGMM l n.a. l
AT+CGMR l n.a. l
AT+CGSN l n.a. l
AT+CIND l l l
AT+CLIP l --- l
AT+CLVL l l l Write command in audio mode 2-6
only
AT+CMEE l l l
AT+CMGF l l l
AT+CMUT l l l Write command depending on audio
mode
AT+CMUX l l Error Only mode 0
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 249 of 256 15.07.2002
AT command Test Read Write /
Execute
Note
AT+COPS Phone busy Unknown --- Not useful without PIN
AT+CPAS l n.a. l Only 0
AT+CPIN l l l
AT+CR l l l
AT+CRC l l l
AT+CREG l l l
AT+CRLP l l l
AT+CSCS l l l
AT+CSNS l l l
AT+CSQ l --- l
AT+CSSN l l l
AT+GCAP l n.a. l
AT+GMI l n.a. l
AT+GMM l n.a. l
AT+GMR l n.a. l
AT+GSN l n.a. l
AT+VTD l l l
AT+VTS l n.a. l
AT+WS46 l l l 12 (GSM digital cellular)
Siemens defined AT commands
AT+CXXCID l n.a. l
AT^SBC l l l
AT^SCID l n.a. l
AT^SBC l l l
AT^SCKS l l l
AT^SCTM l l l
AT^SGAUTH l l l
AT^SHOM l l
AT^SMSO l l l
AT^SM20 l l l
AT^SNFA l l l
AT^SNFD l n.a. l
AT^SNFI l l l Write commd. in audio mode 2-6 only
AT^SNFM l l l Write commd. in audio mode 2-6 only
AT^SNFO l l l Write commd. in audio mode 2-6 only
AT^SNFPT l l l
AT^SNFS l l l
AT^SNFV l l l
AT^SNFW l n.a. l
AT^SPIC l n.a. l
AT^SRTC l l l
AT^SSCONF l l l
AT^SSYNC l l l
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 250 of 256 15.07.2002
9.4 Standard GSM service codes
The following GSM command strings can be sent with the ATD command. Reference: GSM 2.30
Table 15: GSM service codes
*# code Functionality Possible response(s)
Phone security
*#06# Query IMEI <IMEI> OK
**04*oldPIN*newPIN*newPIN# Change PIN1
**042*oldPIN2*newPIN2*newPIN2# Change PIN2
**05*unblKey*newPIN*newPIN# Unlock PIN 1. (Unblock SIM card after
3 failed attempts to enter PIN1)
**052*unblKey*newPIN*newPIN# Unlock PIN2 (after 3 failed attempts to
enter PIN2)
*#0003*MasterPhoneCode# Unlock “PS” lock with Master Phone
Code
*[*]03*[ZZ]*oldPw*newPw*newPw# Registration of net password (change
call barring password)
+CME ERROR: <err> /
OK
See also Chapters 4.21, 4.35, 4.35.1,
4.36.
Phone number presentation
*#30# Check status of CLIP (Calling Line
Identification Presentation)
+CLIP : <n>,<m> OK (Chapter 4.22, p. 94)
*#31# Check status of CLIR (Calling Line
Identification Restriction) +CLIR : <n>,<m> OK (Chapter 4.23, p.95)
*31#<Phonenumber>[;] Suppress CLIR (Chapter 4.23, p.95)
#31#<Phonenumber>[;] Activate CLIR (Chapter 4.23, p.95)
*#76# Check status of COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation)
+COLP: 0,<m> OK (where <m> = active or
not active)
*#77# Check status of COLR (Connected Line
Identification Restriction)
+COLR: 0,<m> OK (where <m> = active or
not active)
Call forwarding (see also Chapter 9.4.1)
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)21*DN*BS# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CFU
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)67*DN*BS# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF busy
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)61*DN*BS*T# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF no reply
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)62*DN*BS# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF no reach
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)002*DN*BS*T# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF all
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)004*DN*BS*T# Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF all cond.
^SCCFC : <reason>, <status>, <class>
[,...] like +CCFC (Chapter 4.6, p. 70)
Call waiting (see also Chapter 9.4.1)
(choice of *,#,*#)43*BS# Activation/deactivation/int WAIT +CCWA: <status>, <class> *)
Call barring (see also Chapter 9.4.1)
(choice of *,#,*#)33*Pw*BS# Act/deact/int BAOC
(choice of *,#,*#)331*Pw*BS# Act/deact/int BAOIC
(choice of *,#,*#)332*Pw*BS# Act/deact/int BAOIC exc.home
(choice of *,#,*#)35*Pw*BS# Act/deact/int. BAIC
(choice of *,#,*#)351*Pw*BS# Act/deact/int BAIC roaming
#330*Pw*BS# Deact. All Barring Services
#333*Pw*BS# Deact. All Outg.Barring Services
#353*Pw*BS# Deactivation. All Inc.Barring Services
^SCLCK: <fac>, <status>, <class> [, ...]
like +CLCK *) (see Chapter 4.21, p. 88)
Call Hold / Multiparty
C[C] in call Call hold and multiparty +CME ERROR: <err> /
OK (see Chapter 4.16, p. 83)
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 251 of 256 15.07.2002
*# code Functionality Possible response(s)
USSD messages
[C]...[C]#
(varies with the serving network)
Send USSD message +CME ERROR: <err> /
OK (see Chapter 4.48, p. 132)
C[C] (excluded 1[C])
(varies with the serving network)
Send USSD message +CME ERROR: <err> /
OK (see Chapter 4.48, p. 132)
Abbreviations of codes and responses used in Table 15
Codes / parameters to be sent with ATD
Barring services 330 ZZ = type of supplementary services:
All services Not specified
DN = dialling number: String of digits 0-9
Voice 11
FAX 13
SMS 16
SMS +FAX 12
Voice + FAX 19
Voice + SMS + FAX 10
Data circuit asynchron 25
Data circuit synchron 24
PAD 27
Packet 26
Data circuit asynchron + PAD 21
Data circuit synchron + packet 22
Data circuit asynchron + syncron. + PAD 20
BS = basic service
equivalent to parameter <class>
All Services ---
T = time in seconds
PW = Password
C = character of TE character set (e.g. asterix, hash or digit in case of USSD, or digits in case of held calls or multiparty calls)
Possible responses
<m> Mode: 0 = not active, 1 = active
<n> Unsolicited result code: 0 = presentation disabled, 1 = presentation enabled
<status> Status: 0 = not active, 1 = active
<class> Represents BS = basic service
See Chapters 4.6 (AT+CCFC), 4.21 (AT+CLCK) and 9.4.1.
<fac> Facility lock. See Chapter 4.21 (AT+CLCK)
<reason> Call forwarding reason
Function of *# codes for Supplementary Services
*# code Abbreviation used in
Chapter 9.4
Function
* act Activate (except for CLIR, see list above)
** reg Register and activate
*# int Check status (interrogate)
# deact Deactivate (except for CLIR, see list above)
## eras Unregister and deactivate
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 252 of 256 15.07.2002
9.4.1 Additional notes on ^SCCFC, ^SCCWA, ^SCLCK
The output of ^SCCFC, ^SCCWA, ^SCLCK depends on the teleservices coded in <class>. If no tele-
service or bearer service is active for a given interrogation “7” is generated as default value for the
<class> parameter, with only line being displayed (see example 1 below). If a service is activated for
one or several classes, only the active classes will be displayed (see example 2).
The number of parameters displayed in the ^SCCFC and ^SCLCK output strings differs from the
equivalent +CCFC and +CLCK output strings: In contrast to the +CCFC string, ^SCCFC also includes
the <reason>. Likewise, the ^SCLCK string includes additionally <fac>.
Example 1
When you check the CFU status of all classes, while none is active the follow-
ing responses will be displayed:
Using at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
OK
Using atd*#21#
^SCCFC: 0,0,7
OK
Example 2
To register and activate CFU for voice calls:
at+ccfc=0,3,01771234567
OK
As an alternative you can use the ATD command:
atd**21*01771234567*11#
^SCCFC: 0,1,1,"+491771234567",,145
OK
To check the status of all CFU settings using ATD (only active class will be
displayed):
atd*#21#
^SCCFC: 0,1,1,"+491771234567",145
OK
To check the status of all CFU settings using AT+CCFC (all classes will be
displayed)
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 1,1,"+491771234567",145
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
OK
Example 3
To query the status of CFU for voice calls:
atd*#21**11#;
^SCCFC: 0,1,1,"+491771234567",145
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 253 of 256 15.07.2002
Example 4
To query the status of CFU for voice + SMS + data:
atd*#21**10#;
^SCCFC: 0,1,1,"+493038649027",145
^SCCFC: 0,1,4,"+493038649027",145
OK
The response does not include SMS, since no call forwarding for SMS is not
active.
Example 5
To query the status of CFU for voice + SMS + data:
atd*#21**10#;
^SCCFC: 0,0,7
OK
No CFU enabled for voice + SMS + data.
Example 6
To register and activate CFU for asynchronous data mode (“Data circuit asyn-
chron”):
atd**21*0301234567*25#
^SCCFC: 0,1,2,"+49301234567",145
OK
Example 7
To query the status of CFU for asynchronous data mode:
If CFU is not active the response is not specific to asynchronous data mode.
atd*#21**25#;
^SCCFC: 0,0,7
OK
If CFU is enabled for asynchronous data mode the response is as follows:
atd*#21**25#
^SCCFC: 0,1,2,"+49301234567",145
OK
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 254 of 256 15.07.2002
9.5 GSM and UCS2 alphabet tables
This section provides tables for the special GSM 03.38 alphabet supported by the ME (see chapter
1.5). Below each GSM character you can find the corresponding two byte UCS2 character value.
b7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
b6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Main character table of
GSM 03.38 alphabet
b5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b4 b3 b2 b1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0 @
0040
D
0394
SP
0020
0
0030
¡
00A1
P
0050
¿
00BF
p
0070
0 0 0 1 1 £
00A3
_
005F
!
0021
1
0031
A
0041
Q
0051
a
0061
q
0071
0 0 1 0 2 $
0024
F
03A6
"
0022
2
0032
B
0042
R
0052
b
0062
r
0072
0 0 1 1 3 ¥
00A5
G
0393
#
0023
3
0033
C
0043
S
0053
c
0063
s
0073
0 1 0 0 4 è
00E8
L
039B
¤
00A4
4
0034
D
0044
T
0054
d
0064
t
0074
0 1 0 1 5 é
00E9
W
03A9
%
0025
5
0035
E
0045
U
0055
e
0065
u
0075
0 1 1 0 6 ù
00F9
P
03A0
&
0026
6
0036
F
0046
V
0056
f
0066
v
0076
0 1 1 1 7 ì
00EC
Y
03A8
'
0027
7
0037
G
0047
W
0057
g
0067
w
0077
1 0 0 0 8 ò
00F2
S
03A3
(
0028
8
0038
H
0048
X
0058
h
0068
x
0078
1 0 0 1 9 ç
00E7
Q
0398
)
0029
9
0039
I
0049
Y
0059
i
0069
y
0079
1 0 1 0 10 /A LF
[LF]2)
X
039E
*
002A
:
003A
J
004A
Z
005A
j
006A
z
007A
1 0 1 1 11 /B Ø
00D8
1)
+
002B
;
003B
K
004B
Ä
00C4
k
006B
ä
00E4
1 1 0 0 12 /C ø
00F8
Æ
00C6
,
002C
<
003C
L
004C
Ö
00D6
l
006C
ö
00F6
1 1 0 1 13 /D CR
[CR]2)
æ
00E6
-
002D
=
003D
M
004D
Ñ
00D1
m
006D
ñ
00F1
1 1 1 0 14 /E Å
00C5
ß
00DF
.
002E
>
003E
N
004E
Ü
00DC
n
006E
ü
00FC
1 1 1 1 15 /F å
00E5
É
00C9
/
002F
?
003F
O
004F
§
00A7
o
006F
à
00E0
1) This code is an escape to the following extension of the 7 bit default alphabet table.
2) This code is not a printable character and therefore not defined for the UCS2 alphabet. It shall be be treated
as the accompanying control character.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 255 of 256 15.07.2002
b7 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
b6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Extension character table of
GSM 03.38 alphabet
b5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b4 b3 b2 b1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0
|
007C
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
^
005E
0 1 0 1 5
€ 2)
20AC
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
{
007B
1 0 0 1 9
}
007D
1 0 1 0 10 /A
3)
[LF]
1 0 1 1 11 /B
1)
1 1 0 0 12 /C
[
005B
1 1 0 1 13 /D
~
007E
1 1 1 0 14 /E
]
005D
1 1 1 1 15 /F
\
005C
In the event that an MS receives a code where a symbol is not represented in the above table
then the MS shall display the character shown in the main default 7 bit alphabet table.
1) This code value is reserved for the extension to another extension table. On receipt of this
code, a receiving entity shall display a space until another extension table is defined.
AT Command Set
MC35_ATC_01_V05.00 Page 256 of 256 15.07.2002
2) This code represents the EURO currency symbol. The code value is the one used for the
character ‘e’. Therefore a receiving entity which is incapable of displaying the EURO cur-
rency symbol will display the character ‘e’ instead.
3) This code is defined as a Page Break character and may be used for example in com-
pressed CBS messages. Any mobile which does not understand the 7 bit default alphabet
table extension mechanism will treat this character as Line Feed.

Navigation menu